blob: 3b5ea9fa539baaad31a7508194bded9195c31305 [file] [log] [blame]
Ted Kremenekb60d87c2009-08-26 22:36:44 +00001/*===-- clang-c/Index.h - Indexing Public C Interface -------------*- C -*-===*\
2|* *|
3|* The LLVM Compiler Infrastructure *|
4|* *|
5|* This file is distributed under the University of Illinois Open Source *|
6|* License. See LICENSE.TXT for details. *|
7|* *|
8|*===----------------------------------------------------------------------===*|
9|* *|
Marc-Andre Laperlef9abd402017-06-16 20:58:26 +000010|* This header provides a public interface to a Clang library for extracting *|
Ted Kremenekb60d87c2009-08-26 22:36:44 +000011|* high-level symbol information from source files without exposing the full *|
12|* Clang C++ API. *|
13|* *|
14\*===----------------------------------------------------------------------===*/
15
Benjamin Kramer2f5db8b2014-08-13 16:25:19 +000016#ifndef LLVM_CLANG_C_INDEX_H
17#define LLVM_CLANG_C_INDEX_H
Ted Kremenekb60d87c2009-08-26 22:36:44 +000018
Chandler Carruthaacafe52009-12-17 09:27:29 +000019#include <time.h>
Steve Naroff6231f182009-10-27 14:35:18 +000020
Arnaud A. de Grandmaison0271b322012-06-28 22:01:06 +000021#include "clang-c/Platform.h"
Argyrios Kyrtzidis0b9682e2014-02-25 03:59:23 +000022#include "clang-c/CXErrorCode.h"
Arnaud A. de Grandmaison0271b322012-06-28 22:01:06 +000023#include "clang-c/CXString.h"
Argyrios Kyrtzidis09a439d2014-02-25 03:59:16 +000024#include "clang-c/BuildSystem.h"
Arnaud A. de Grandmaison0271b322012-06-28 22:01:06 +000025
Argyrios Kyrtzidis1c4db8d2012-11-06 21:21:49 +000026/**
27 * \brief The version constants for the libclang API.
28 * CINDEX_VERSION_MINOR should increase when there are API additions.
29 * CINDEX_VERSION_MAJOR is intended for "major" source/ABI breaking changes.
30 *
31 * The policy about the libclang API was always to keep it source and ABI
32 * compatible, thus CINDEX_VERSION_MAJOR is expected to remain stable.
33 */
Argyrios Kyrtzidis5b216ed2012-10-29 23:24:44 +000034#define CINDEX_VERSION_MAJOR 0
Argyrios Kyrtzidis735e92c2017-06-09 01:20:48 +000035#define CINDEX_VERSION_MINOR 43
Argyrios Kyrtzidis5b216ed2012-10-29 23:24:44 +000036
37#define CINDEX_VERSION_ENCODE(major, minor) ( \
38 ((major) * 10000) \
39 + ((minor) * 1))
40
41#define CINDEX_VERSION CINDEX_VERSION_ENCODE( \
42 CINDEX_VERSION_MAJOR, \
43 CINDEX_VERSION_MINOR )
44
45#define CINDEX_VERSION_STRINGIZE_(major, minor) \
46 #major"."#minor
47#define CINDEX_VERSION_STRINGIZE(major, minor) \
48 CINDEX_VERSION_STRINGIZE_(major, minor)
49
50#define CINDEX_VERSION_STRING CINDEX_VERSION_STRINGIZE( \
51 CINDEX_VERSION_MAJOR, \
52 CINDEX_VERSION_MINOR)
53
Ted Kremenekb60d87c2009-08-26 22:36:44 +000054#ifdef __cplusplus
55extern "C" {
56#endif
57
Douglas Gregor4a4e0eb2011-02-23 17:45:25 +000058/** \defgroup CINDEX libclang: C Interface to Clang
Douglas Gregor52606ff2010-01-20 01:10:47 +000059 *
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +000060 * The C Interface to Clang provides a relatively small API that exposes
Douglas Gregorc8e390c2010-01-20 22:45:41 +000061 * facilities for parsing source code into an abstract syntax tree (AST),
62 * loading already-parsed ASTs, traversing the AST, associating
63 * physical source locations with elements within the AST, and other
64 * facilities that support Clang-based development tools.
Douglas Gregor52606ff2010-01-20 01:10:47 +000065 *
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +000066 * This C interface to Clang will never provide all of the information
Douglas Gregorc8e390c2010-01-20 22:45:41 +000067 * representation stored in Clang's C++ AST, nor should it: the intent is to
68 * maintain an API that is relatively stable from one release to the next,
69 * providing only the basic functionality needed to support development tools.
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +000070 *
71 * To avoid namespace pollution, data types are prefixed with "CX" and
Douglas Gregorc8e390c2010-01-20 22:45:41 +000072 * functions are prefixed with "clang_".
Douglas Gregor52606ff2010-01-20 01:10:47 +000073 *
74 * @{
75 */
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +000076
Douglas Gregor802f12f2010-01-20 22:28:27 +000077/**
78 * \brief An "index" that consists of a set of translation units that would
79 * typically be linked together into an executable or library.
80 */
81typedef void *CXIndex;
Steve Naroffd5e8e862009-08-27 19:51:58 +000082
Douglas Gregor802f12f2010-01-20 22:28:27 +000083/**
Emilio Cobos Alvarez485ad422017-04-28 15:56:39 +000084 * \brief An opaque type representing target information for a given translation
85 * unit.
86 */
87typedef struct CXTargetInfoImpl *CXTargetInfo;
88
89/**
Douglas Gregor802f12f2010-01-20 22:28:27 +000090 * \brief A single translation unit, which resides in an index.
91 */
Ted Kremenek7df92ae2010-11-17 23:24:11 +000092typedef struct CXTranslationUnitImpl *CXTranslationUnit;
Steve Naroffd5e8e862009-08-27 19:51:58 +000093
Douglas Gregor802f12f2010-01-20 22:28:27 +000094/**
Douglas Gregor6007cf22010-01-22 22:29:16 +000095 * \brief Opaque pointer representing client data that will be passed through
96 * to various callbacks and visitors.
Douglas Gregor802f12f2010-01-20 22:28:27 +000097 */
Douglas Gregor6007cf22010-01-22 22:29:16 +000098typedef void *CXClientData;
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +000099
Douglas Gregor9485bf92009-12-02 09:21:34 +0000100/**
101 * \brief Provides the contents of a file that has not yet been saved to disk.
102 *
103 * Each CXUnsavedFile instance provides the name of a file on the
104 * system along with the current contents of that file that have not
105 * yet been saved to disk.
106 */
107struct CXUnsavedFile {
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +0000108 /**
109 * \brief The file whose contents have not yet been saved.
Douglas Gregor9485bf92009-12-02 09:21:34 +0000110 *
111 * This file must already exist in the file system.
112 */
113 const char *Filename;
114
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +0000115 /**
Douglas Gregor89a56c52010-02-27 01:32:48 +0000116 * \brief A buffer containing the unsaved contents of this file.
Douglas Gregor9485bf92009-12-02 09:21:34 +0000117 */
118 const char *Contents;
119
120 /**
Douglas Gregor89a56c52010-02-27 01:32:48 +0000121 * \brief The length of the unsaved contents of this buffer.
Douglas Gregor9485bf92009-12-02 09:21:34 +0000122 */
123 unsigned long Length;
124};
125
Peter Collingbourne5caf5af2010-08-24 00:31:37 +0000126/**
127 * \brief Describes the availability of a particular entity, which indicates
128 * whether the use of this entity will result in a warning or error due to
129 * it being deprecated or unavailable.
130 */
Douglas Gregorf757a122010-08-23 23:00:57 +0000131enum CXAvailabilityKind {
Peter Collingbourne5caf5af2010-08-24 00:31:37 +0000132 /**
133 * \brief The entity is available.
134 */
Douglas Gregorf757a122010-08-23 23:00:57 +0000135 CXAvailability_Available,
Peter Collingbourne5caf5af2010-08-24 00:31:37 +0000136 /**
137 * \brief The entity is available, but has been deprecated (and its use is
138 * not recommended).
139 */
Douglas Gregorf757a122010-08-23 23:00:57 +0000140 CXAvailability_Deprecated,
Peter Collingbourne5caf5af2010-08-24 00:31:37 +0000141 /**
142 * \brief The entity is not available; any use of it will be an error.
143 */
Erik Verbruggen2e657ff2011-10-06 07:27:49 +0000144 CXAvailability_NotAvailable,
145 /**
146 * \brief The entity is available, but not accessible; any use of it will be
147 * an error.
148 */
149 CXAvailability_NotAccessible
Douglas Gregorf757a122010-08-23 23:00:57 +0000150};
Douglas Gregord6225d32012-05-08 00:14:45 +0000151
152/**
153 * \brief Describes a version number of the form major.minor.subminor.
154 */
155typedef struct CXVersion {
156 /**
157 * \brief The major version number, e.g., the '10' in '10.7.3'. A negative
158 * value indicates that there is no version number at all.
159 */
160 int Major;
161 /**
162 * \brief The minor version number, e.g., the '7' in '10.7.3'. This value
163 * will be negative if no minor version number was provided, e.g., for
164 * version '10'.
165 */
166 int Minor;
167 /**
168 * \brief The subminor version number, e.g., the '3' in '10.7.3'. This value
169 * will be negative if no minor or subminor version number was provided,
170 * e.g., in version '10' or '10.7'.
171 */
172 int Subminor;
173} CXVersion;
Jonathan Coe0a5b03b2017-06-27 22:54:56 +0000174
175/**
176 * \brief Describes the exception specification of a cursor.
177 *
178 * A negative value indicates that the cursor is not a function declaration.
179 */
180enum CXCursor_ExceptionSpecificationKind {
181
182 /**
183 * \brief The cursor has no exception specification.
184 */
185 CXCursor_ExceptionSpecificationKind_None,
186
187 /**
188 * \brief The cursor has exception specification throw()
189 */
190 CXCursor_ExceptionSpecificationKind_DynamicNone,
191
192 /**
193 * \brief The cursor has exception specification throw(T1, T2)
194 */
195 CXCursor_ExceptionSpecificationKind_Dynamic,
196
197 /**
198 * \brief The cursor has exception specification throw(...).
199 */
200 CXCursor_ExceptionSpecificationKind_MSAny,
201
202 /**
203 * \brief The cursor has exception specification basic noexcept.
204 */
205 CXCursor_ExceptionSpecificationKind_BasicNoexcept,
206
207 /**
208 * \brief The cursor has exception specification computed noexcept.
209 */
210 CXCursor_ExceptionSpecificationKind_ComputedNoexcept,
211
212 /**
213 * \brief The exception specification has not yet been evaluated.
214 */
215 CXCursor_ExceptionSpecificationKind_Unevaluated,
216
217 /**
218 * \brief The exception specification has not yet been instantiated.
219 */
220 CXCursor_ExceptionSpecificationKind_Uninstantiated,
221
222 /**
223 * \brief The exception specification has not been parsed yet.
224 */
225 CXCursor_ExceptionSpecificationKind_Unparsed
226};
227
Douglas Gregor802f12f2010-01-20 22:28:27 +0000228/**
James Dennett574cb4c2012-06-15 05:41:51 +0000229 * \brief Provides a shared context for creating translation units.
230 *
231 * It provides two options:
Steve Naroff531e2842009-10-20 14:46:24 +0000232 *
233 * - excludeDeclarationsFromPCH: When non-zero, allows enumeration of "local"
234 * declarations (when loading any new translation units). A "local" declaration
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +0000235 * is one that belongs in the translation unit itself and not in a precompiled
Steve Naroff531e2842009-10-20 14:46:24 +0000236 * header that was used by the translation unit. If zero, all declarations
237 * will be enumerated.
238 *
Steve Naroffbb4568a2009-10-20 16:36:34 +0000239 * Here is an example:
240 *
James Dennett574cb4c2012-06-15 05:41:51 +0000241 * \code
Douglas Gregor1e21cc72010-02-18 23:07:20 +0000242 * // excludeDeclsFromPCH = 1, displayDiagnostics=1
243 * Idx = clang_createIndex(1, 1);
Steve Naroffbb4568a2009-10-20 16:36:34 +0000244 *
245 * // IndexTest.pch was produced with the following command:
246 * // "clang -x c IndexTest.h -emit-ast -o IndexTest.pch"
247 * TU = clang_createTranslationUnit(Idx, "IndexTest.pch");
248 *
249 * // This will load all the symbols from 'IndexTest.pch'
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +0000250 * clang_visitChildren(clang_getTranslationUnitCursor(TU),
Douglas Gregor990b5762010-01-20 21:37:00 +0000251 * TranslationUnitVisitor, 0);
Steve Naroffbb4568a2009-10-20 16:36:34 +0000252 * clang_disposeTranslationUnit(TU);
253 *
254 * // This will load all the symbols from 'IndexTest.c', excluding symbols
255 * // from 'IndexTest.pch'.
Daniel Dunbard0159262010-01-25 00:43:14 +0000256 * char *args[] = { "-Xclang", "-include-pch=IndexTest.pch" };
257 * TU = clang_createTranslationUnitFromSourceFile(Idx, "IndexTest.c", 2, args,
258 * 0, 0);
Douglas Gregorfed36b12010-01-20 23:57:43 +0000259 * clang_visitChildren(clang_getTranslationUnitCursor(TU),
260 * TranslationUnitVisitor, 0);
Steve Naroffbb4568a2009-10-20 16:36:34 +0000261 * clang_disposeTranslationUnit(TU);
James Dennett574cb4c2012-06-15 05:41:51 +0000262 * \endcode
Steve Naroffbb4568a2009-10-20 16:36:34 +0000263 *
264 * This process of creating the 'pch', loading it separately, and using it (via
265 * -include-pch) allows 'excludeDeclsFromPCH' to remove redundant callbacks
266 * (which gives the indexer the same performance benefit as the compiler).
Steve Naroff531e2842009-10-20 14:46:24 +0000267 */
Douglas Gregor1e21cc72010-02-18 23:07:20 +0000268CINDEX_LINKAGE CXIndex clang_createIndex(int excludeDeclarationsFromPCH,
269 int displayDiagnostics);
Ted Kremenekd071c602010-03-13 02:50:34 +0000270
Douglas Gregor408bb742010-02-08 23:03:06 +0000271/**
272 * \brief Destroy the given index.
273 *
274 * The index must not be destroyed until all of the translation units created
275 * within that index have been destroyed.
276 */
Daniel Dunbar11089662009-12-03 01:54:28 +0000277CINDEX_LINKAGE void clang_disposeIndex(CXIndex index);
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +0000278
Argyrios Kyrtzidis7317a5c2012-03-28 02:18:05 +0000279typedef enum {
280 /**
281 * \brief Used to indicate that no special CXIndex options are needed.
282 */
283 CXGlobalOpt_None = 0x0,
284
285 /**
286 * \brief Used to indicate that threads that libclang creates for indexing
287 * purposes should use background priority.
James Dennett574cb4c2012-06-15 05:41:51 +0000288 *
289 * Affects #clang_indexSourceFile, #clang_indexTranslationUnit,
290 * #clang_parseTranslationUnit, #clang_saveTranslationUnit.
Argyrios Kyrtzidis7317a5c2012-03-28 02:18:05 +0000291 */
292 CXGlobalOpt_ThreadBackgroundPriorityForIndexing = 0x1,
293
294 /**
295 * \brief Used to indicate that threads that libclang creates for editing
296 * purposes should use background priority.
James Dennett574cb4c2012-06-15 05:41:51 +0000297 *
298 * Affects #clang_reparseTranslationUnit, #clang_codeCompleteAt,
299 * #clang_annotateTokens
Argyrios Kyrtzidis7317a5c2012-03-28 02:18:05 +0000300 */
301 CXGlobalOpt_ThreadBackgroundPriorityForEditing = 0x2,
302
303 /**
304 * \brief Used to indicate that all threads that libclang creates should use
305 * background priority.
306 */
307 CXGlobalOpt_ThreadBackgroundPriorityForAll =
308 CXGlobalOpt_ThreadBackgroundPriorityForIndexing |
309 CXGlobalOpt_ThreadBackgroundPriorityForEditing
310
311} CXGlobalOptFlags;
312
313/**
James Dennett574cb4c2012-06-15 05:41:51 +0000314 * \brief Sets general options associated with a CXIndex.
Argyrios Kyrtzidis7317a5c2012-03-28 02:18:05 +0000315 *
316 * For example:
317 * \code
318 * CXIndex idx = ...;
319 * clang_CXIndex_setGlobalOptions(idx,
320 * clang_CXIndex_getGlobalOptions(idx) |
321 * CXGlobalOpt_ThreadBackgroundPriorityForIndexing);
322 * \endcode
323 *
324 * \param options A bitmask of options, a bitwise OR of CXGlobalOpt_XXX flags.
325 */
326CINDEX_LINKAGE void clang_CXIndex_setGlobalOptions(CXIndex, unsigned options);
327
328/**
329 * \brief Gets the general options associated with a CXIndex.
330 *
331 * \returns A bitmask of options, a bitwise OR of CXGlobalOpt_XXX flags that
332 * are associated with the given CXIndex object.
333 */
334CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_CXIndex_getGlobalOptions(CXIndex);
335
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +0000336/**
Douglas Gregor6007cf22010-01-22 22:29:16 +0000337 * \defgroup CINDEX_FILES File manipulation routines
Douglas Gregorc8e390c2010-01-20 22:45:41 +0000338 *
339 * @{
340 */
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +0000341
Douglas Gregorc8e390c2010-01-20 22:45:41 +0000342/**
343 * \brief A particular source file that is part of a translation unit.
344 */
345typedef void *CXFile;
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +0000346
Douglas Gregorc8e390c2010-01-20 22:45:41 +0000347/**
348 * \brief Retrieve the complete file and path name of the given file.
Steve Naroff6231f182009-10-27 14:35:18 +0000349 */
Ted Kremenekc560b682010-02-17 00:41:20 +0000350CINDEX_LINKAGE CXString clang_getFileName(CXFile SFile);
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +0000351
Douglas Gregorc8e390c2010-01-20 22:45:41 +0000352/**
353 * \brief Retrieve the last modification time of the given file.
354 */
Douglas Gregor249c1212009-10-31 15:48:08 +0000355CINDEX_LINKAGE time_t clang_getFileTime(CXFile SFile);
Steve Naroff6231f182009-10-27 14:35:18 +0000356
Douglas Gregor49c4baf2010-01-18 22:13:09 +0000357/**
Argyrios Kyrtzidisac08b262013-01-26 04:52:52 +0000358 * \brief Uniquely identifies a CXFile, that refers to the same underlying file,
359 * across an indexing session.
360 */
361typedef struct {
362 unsigned long long data[3];
363} CXFileUniqueID;
364
365/**
366 * \brief Retrieve the unique ID for the given \c file.
367 *
368 * \param file the file to get the ID for.
369 * \param outID stores the returned CXFileUniqueID.
370 * \returns If there was a failure getting the unique ID, returns non-zero,
371 * otherwise returns 0.
372*/
373CINDEX_LINKAGE int clang_getFileUniqueID(CXFile file, CXFileUniqueID *outID);
374
375/**
Douglas Gregor37aa4932011-05-04 00:14:37 +0000376 * \brief Determine whether the given header is guarded against
377 * multiple inclusions, either with the conventional
James Dennett574cb4c2012-06-15 05:41:51 +0000378 * \#ifndef/\#define/\#endif macro guards or with \#pragma once.
Douglas Gregor37aa4932011-05-04 00:14:37 +0000379 */
380CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned
381clang_isFileMultipleIncludeGuarded(CXTranslationUnit tu, CXFile file);
382
383/**
Douglas Gregor816fd362010-01-22 21:44:22 +0000384 * \brief Retrieve a file handle within the given translation unit.
385 *
386 * \param tu the translation unit
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +0000387 *
Samuel Antao4c8035b2016-12-12 18:00:20 +0000388 * \param file_name the name of the file.
Douglas Gregor816fd362010-01-22 21:44:22 +0000389 *
390 * \returns the file handle for the named file in the translation unit \p tu,
391 * or a NULL file handle if the file was not a part of this translation unit.
392 */
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +0000393CINDEX_LINKAGE CXFile clang_getFile(CXTranslationUnit tu,
Douglas Gregor816fd362010-01-22 21:44:22 +0000394 const char *file_name);
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +0000395
Douglas Gregor816fd362010-01-22 21:44:22 +0000396/**
Argyrios Kyrtzidisac3997e2014-08-16 00:26:19 +0000397 * \brief Returns non-zero if the \c file1 and \c file2 point to the same file,
398 * or they are both NULL.
399 */
400CINDEX_LINKAGE int clang_File_isEqual(CXFile file1, CXFile file2);
401
402/**
Douglas Gregorc8e390c2010-01-20 22:45:41 +0000403 * @}
404 */
405
406/**
407 * \defgroup CINDEX_LOCATIONS Physical source locations
408 *
409 * Clang represents physical source locations in its abstract syntax tree in
410 * great detail, with file, line, and column information for the majority of
411 * the tokens parsed in the source code. These data types and functions are
412 * used to represent source location information, either for a particular
413 * point in the program or for a range of points in the program, and extract
414 * specific location information from those data types.
415 *
416 * @{
417 */
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +0000418
Douglas Gregorc8e390c2010-01-20 22:45:41 +0000419/**
Douglas Gregor4f46e782010-01-19 21:36:55 +0000420 * \brief Identifies a specific source location within a translation
421 * unit.
422 *
Chandler Carruth4aa01ef2011-08-31 16:53:37 +0000423 * Use clang_getExpansionLocation() or clang_getSpellingLocation()
Douglas Gregor229bebd2010-11-09 06:24:54 +0000424 * to map a source location to a particular file, line, and column.
Douglas Gregor49c4baf2010-01-18 22:13:09 +0000425 */
426typedef struct {
Argyrios Kyrtzidis49d9d0292013-01-11 22:29:47 +0000427 const void *ptr_data[2];
Douglas Gregor4f46e782010-01-19 21:36:55 +0000428 unsigned int_data;
Douglas Gregor49c4baf2010-01-18 22:13:09 +0000429} CXSourceLocation;
Ted Kremeneka44d99c2010-01-05 23:18:49 +0000430
Douglas Gregor49c4baf2010-01-18 22:13:09 +0000431/**
Daniel Dunbar02968e52010-02-14 10:02:57 +0000432 * \brief Identifies a half-open character range in the source code.
Douglas Gregor49c4baf2010-01-18 22:13:09 +0000433 *
Douglas Gregor4f46e782010-01-19 21:36:55 +0000434 * Use clang_getRangeStart() and clang_getRangeEnd() to retrieve the
435 * starting and end locations from a source range, respectively.
Douglas Gregor49c4baf2010-01-18 22:13:09 +0000436 */
437typedef struct {
Argyrios Kyrtzidis49d9d0292013-01-11 22:29:47 +0000438 const void *ptr_data[2];
Douglas Gregor4f46e782010-01-19 21:36:55 +0000439 unsigned begin_int_data;
440 unsigned end_int_data;
Douglas Gregor49c4baf2010-01-18 22:13:09 +0000441} CXSourceRange;
Ted Kremeneka44d99c2010-01-05 23:18:49 +0000442
Douglas Gregor4f46e782010-01-19 21:36:55 +0000443/**
Douglas Gregor816fd362010-01-22 21:44:22 +0000444 * \brief Retrieve a NULL (invalid) source location.
445 */
NAKAMURA Takumieacd6672013-01-10 02:12:38 +0000446CINDEX_LINKAGE CXSourceLocation clang_getNullLocation(void);
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +0000447
Douglas Gregor816fd362010-01-22 21:44:22 +0000448/**
James Dennett574cb4c2012-06-15 05:41:51 +0000449 * \brief Determine whether two source locations, which must refer into
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +0000450 * the same translation unit, refer to exactly the same point in the source
Douglas Gregor816fd362010-01-22 21:44:22 +0000451 * code.
452 *
453 * \returns non-zero if the source locations refer to the same location, zero
454 * if they refer to different locations.
455 */
456CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_equalLocations(CXSourceLocation loc1,
457 CXSourceLocation loc2);
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +0000458
Douglas Gregor816fd362010-01-22 21:44:22 +0000459/**
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +0000460 * \brief Retrieves the source location associated with a given file/line/column
461 * in a particular translation unit.
Douglas Gregor816fd362010-01-22 21:44:22 +0000462 */
463CINDEX_LINKAGE CXSourceLocation clang_getLocation(CXTranslationUnit tu,
464 CXFile file,
465 unsigned line,
466 unsigned column);
David Chisnall2e16ac52010-10-15 17:07:39 +0000467/**
468 * \brief Retrieves the source location associated with a given character offset
469 * in a particular translation unit.
470 */
471CINDEX_LINKAGE CXSourceLocation clang_getLocationForOffset(CXTranslationUnit tu,
472 CXFile file,
473 unsigned offset);
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +0000474
Douglas Gregor816fd362010-01-22 21:44:22 +0000475/**
Argyrios Kyrtzidis25f7af12013-04-12 17:06:51 +0000476 * \brief Returns non-zero if the given source location is in a system header.
477 */
478CINDEX_LINKAGE int clang_Location_isInSystemHeader(CXSourceLocation location);
479
480/**
Stefanus Du Toitdb51c632013-08-08 17:48:14 +0000481 * \brief Returns non-zero if the given source location is in the main file of
482 * the corresponding translation unit.
483 */
484CINDEX_LINKAGE int clang_Location_isFromMainFile(CXSourceLocation location);
485
486/**
Douglas Gregor4f9c3762010-01-28 00:27:43 +0000487 * \brief Retrieve a NULL (invalid) source range.
488 */
NAKAMURA Takumieacd6672013-01-10 02:12:38 +0000489CINDEX_LINKAGE CXSourceRange clang_getNullRange(void);
Ted Kremenekd071c602010-03-13 02:50:34 +0000490
Douglas Gregor4f9c3762010-01-28 00:27:43 +0000491/**
Douglas Gregor816fd362010-01-22 21:44:22 +0000492 * \brief Retrieve a source range given the beginning and ending source
493 * locations.
494 */
495CINDEX_LINKAGE CXSourceRange clang_getRange(CXSourceLocation begin,
496 CXSourceLocation end);
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +0000497
Douglas Gregor816fd362010-01-22 21:44:22 +0000498/**
Douglas Gregor757e38b2011-07-23 19:35:14 +0000499 * \brief Determine whether two ranges are equivalent.
500 *
501 * \returns non-zero if the ranges are the same, zero if they differ.
502 */
503CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_equalRanges(CXSourceRange range1,
504 CXSourceRange range2);
505
506/**
Dmitri Gribenko8994e0c2012-09-13 13:11:20 +0000507 * \brief Returns non-zero if \p range is null.
Argyrios Kyrtzidise7e42912011-09-28 18:14:21 +0000508 */
Erik Verbruggend610b0f2011-10-06 12:11:57 +0000509CINDEX_LINKAGE int clang_Range_isNull(CXSourceRange range);
Argyrios Kyrtzidise7e42912011-09-28 18:14:21 +0000510
511/**
Douglas Gregor9bd6db52010-01-26 19:19:08 +0000512 * \brief Retrieve the file, line, column, and offset represented by
513 * the given source location.
Douglas Gregor4f46e782010-01-19 21:36:55 +0000514 *
Chandler Carruth4aa01ef2011-08-31 16:53:37 +0000515 * If the location refers into a macro expansion, retrieves the
516 * location of the macro expansion.
Douglas Gregor229bebd2010-11-09 06:24:54 +0000517 *
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +0000518 * \param location the location within a source file that will be decomposed
519 * into its parts.
Douglas Gregor4f46e782010-01-19 21:36:55 +0000520 *
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +0000521 * \param file [out] if non-NULL, will be set to the file to which the given
Douglas Gregor4f46e782010-01-19 21:36:55 +0000522 * source location points.
523 *
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +0000524 * \param line [out] if non-NULL, will be set to the line to which the given
Douglas Gregor4f46e782010-01-19 21:36:55 +0000525 * source location points.
526 *
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +0000527 * \param column [out] if non-NULL, will be set to the column to which the given
528 * source location points.
Douglas Gregor9bd6db52010-01-26 19:19:08 +0000529 *
530 * \param offset [out] if non-NULL, will be set to the offset into the
531 * buffer to which the given source location points.
Douglas Gregor4f46e782010-01-19 21:36:55 +0000532 */
Chandler Carruth4aa01ef2011-08-31 16:53:37 +0000533CINDEX_LINKAGE void clang_getExpansionLocation(CXSourceLocation location,
534 CXFile *file,
535 unsigned *line,
536 unsigned *column,
537 unsigned *offset);
538
539/**
Vassil Vassilev4b8e29d2017-04-06 10:05:46 +0000540 * \brief Retrieve the file, line and column represented by the given source
541 * location, as specified in a # line directive.
Argyrios Kyrtzidis91672b32011-09-13 21:49:08 +0000542 *
543 * Example: given the following source code in a file somefile.c
544 *
James Dennett574cb4c2012-06-15 05:41:51 +0000545 * \code
Argyrios Kyrtzidis91672b32011-09-13 21:49:08 +0000546 * #123 "dummy.c" 1
547 *
548 * static int func(void)
549 * {
550 * return 0;
551 * }
James Dennett574cb4c2012-06-15 05:41:51 +0000552 * \endcode
Argyrios Kyrtzidis91672b32011-09-13 21:49:08 +0000553 *
554 * the location information returned by this function would be
555 *
556 * File: dummy.c Line: 124 Column: 12
557 *
558 * whereas clang_getExpansionLocation would have returned
559 *
560 * File: somefile.c Line: 3 Column: 12
561 *
562 * \param location the location within a source file that will be decomposed
563 * into its parts.
564 *
565 * \param filename [out] if non-NULL, will be set to the filename of the
566 * source location. Note that filenames returned will be for "virtual" files,
567 * which don't necessarily exist on the machine running clang - e.g. when
568 * parsing preprocessed output obtained from a different environment. If
569 * a non-NULL value is passed in, remember to dispose of the returned value
570 * using \c clang_disposeString() once you've finished with it. For an invalid
571 * source location, an empty string is returned.
572 *
573 * \param line [out] if non-NULL, will be set to the line number of the
574 * source location. For an invalid source location, zero is returned.
575 *
576 * \param column [out] if non-NULL, will be set to the column number of the
577 * source location. For an invalid source location, zero is returned.
578 */
579CINDEX_LINKAGE void clang_getPresumedLocation(CXSourceLocation location,
580 CXString *filename,
581 unsigned *line,
582 unsigned *column);
583
584/**
Chandler Carruth4aa01ef2011-08-31 16:53:37 +0000585 * \brief Legacy API to retrieve the file, line, column, and offset represented
586 * by the given source location.
587 *
588 * This interface has been replaced by the newer interface
James Dennett574cb4c2012-06-15 05:41:51 +0000589 * #clang_getExpansionLocation(). See that interface's documentation for
Chandler Carruth4aa01ef2011-08-31 16:53:37 +0000590 * details.
591 */
Douglas Gregor4f46e782010-01-19 21:36:55 +0000592CINDEX_LINKAGE void clang_getInstantiationLocation(CXSourceLocation location,
593 CXFile *file,
594 unsigned *line,
Douglas Gregor9bd6db52010-01-26 19:19:08 +0000595 unsigned *column,
596 unsigned *offset);
Douglas Gregor47751d62010-01-26 03:07:15 +0000597
598/**
Douglas Gregor229bebd2010-11-09 06:24:54 +0000599 * \brief Retrieve the file, line, column, and offset represented by
600 * the given source location.
601 *
602 * If the location refers into a macro instantiation, return where the
603 * location was originally spelled in the source file.
604 *
605 * \param location the location within a source file that will be decomposed
606 * into its parts.
607 *
608 * \param file [out] if non-NULL, will be set to the file to which the given
609 * source location points.
610 *
611 * \param line [out] if non-NULL, will be set to the line to which the given
612 * source location points.
613 *
614 * \param column [out] if non-NULL, will be set to the column to which the given
615 * source location points.
616 *
617 * \param offset [out] if non-NULL, will be set to the offset into the
618 * buffer to which the given source location points.
619 */
620CINDEX_LINKAGE void clang_getSpellingLocation(CXSourceLocation location,
621 CXFile *file,
622 unsigned *line,
623 unsigned *column,
624 unsigned *offset);
625
626/**
Argyrios Kyrtzidis56be7162013-01-04 18:30:13 +0000627 * \brief Retrieve the file, line, column, and offset represented by
628 * the given source location.
629 *
630 * If the location refers into a macro expansion, return where the macro was
631 * expanded or where the macro argument was written, if the location points at
632 * a macro argument.
633 *
634 * \param location the location within a source file that will be decomposed
635 * into its parts.
636 *
637 * \param file [out] if non-NULL, will be set to the file to which the given
638 * source location points.
639 *
640 * \param line [out] if non-NULL, will be set to the line to which the given
641 * source location points.
642 *
643 * \param column [out] if non-NULL, will be set to the column to which the given
644 * source location points.
645 *
646 * \param offset [out] if non-NULL, will be set to the offset into the
647 * buffer to which the given source location points.
648 */
649CINDEX_LINKAGE void clang_getFileLocation(CXSourceLocation location,
650 CXFile *file,
651 unsigned *line,
652 unsigned *column,
653 unsigned *offset);
654
655/**
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +0000656 * \brief Retrieve a source location representing the first character within a
657 * source range.
Douglas Gregor4f46e782010-01-19 21:36:55 +0000658 */
659CINDEX_LINKAGE CXSourceLocation clang_getRangeStart(CXSourceRange range);
660
661/**
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +0000662 * \brief Retrieve a source location representing the last character within a
663 * source range.
Douglas Gregor4f46e782010-01-19 21:36:55 +0000664 */
665CINDEX_LINKAGE CXSourceLocation clang_getRangeEnd(CXSourceRange range);
666
Douglas Gregorc8e390c2010-01-20 22:45:41 +0000667/**
Argyrios Kyrtzidis0e282ef2013-12-06 18:55:45 +0000668 * \brief Identifies an array of ranges.
Argyrios Kyrtzidis9ef57752013-12-05 08:19:32 +0000669 */
670typedef struct {
671 /** \brief The number of ranges in the \c ranges array. */
672 unsigned count;
673 /**
Argyrios Kyrtzidis0e282ef2013-12-06 18:55:45 +0000674 * \brief An array of \c CXSourceRanges.
Argyrios Kyrtzidis9ef57752013-12-05 08:19:32 +0000675 */
676 CXSourceRange *ranges;
Argyrios Kyrtzidis0e282ef2013-12-06 18:55:45 +0000677} CXSourceRangeList;
Argyrios Kyrtzidis9ef57752013-12-05 08:19:32 +0000678
679/**
680 * \brief Retrieve all ranges that were skipped by the preprocessor.
Argyrios Kyrtzidis0e282ef2013-12-06 18:55:45 +0000681 *
682 * The preprocessor will skip lines when they are surrounded by an
683 * if/ifdef/ifndef directive whose condition does not evaluate to true.
Argyrios Kyrtzidis9ef57752013-12-05 08:19:32 +0000684 */
Argyrios Kyrtzidis0e282ef2013-12-06 18:55:45 +0000685CINDEX_LINKAGE CXSourceRangeList *clang_getSkippedRanges(CXTranslationUnit tu,
686 CXFile file);
Argyrios Kyrtzidis9ef57752013-12-05 08:19:32 +0000687
688/**
Cameron Desrochersd8091282016-08-18 15:43:55 +0000689 * \brief Retrieve all ranges from all files that were skipped by the
690 * preprocessor.
691 *
692 * The preprocessor will skip lines when they are surrounded by an
693 * if/ifdef/ifndef directive whose condition does not evaluate to true.
694 */
695CINDEX_LINKAGE CXSourceRangeList *clang_getAllSkippedRanges(CXTranslationUnit tu);
696
697/**
Argyrios Kyrtzidis0e282ef2013-12-06 18:55:45 +0000698 * \brief Destroy the given \c CXSourceRangeList.
Argyrios Kyrtzidis9ef57752013-12-05 08:19:32 +0000699 */
Argyrios Kyrtzidis0e282ef2013-12-06 18:55:45 +0000700CINDEX_LINKAGE void clang_disposeSourceRangeList(CXSourceRangeList *ranges);
Argyrios Kyrtzidis9ef57752013-12-05 08:19:32 +0000701
702/**
Douglas Gregorc8e390c2010-01-20 22:45:41 +0000703 * @}
704 */
Douglas Gregor6007cf22010-01-22 22:29:16 +0000705
706/**
Douglas Gregor4f9c3762010-01-28 00:27:43 +0000707 * \defgroup CINDEX_DIAG Diagnostic reporting
708 *
709 * @{
710 */
711
712/**
713 * \brief Describes the severity of a particular diagnostic.
714 */
715enum CXDiagnosticSeverity {
716 /**
Ted Kremenekd071c602010-03-13 02:50:34 +0000717 * \brief A diagnostic that has been suppressed, e.g., by a command-line
Douglas Gregor4f9c3762010-01-28 00:27:43 +0000718 * option.
719 */
720 CXDiagnostic_Ignored = 0,
Ted Kremenekd071c602010-03-13 02:50:34 +0000721
Douglas Gregor4f9c3762010-01-28 00:27:43 +0000722 /**
723 * \brief This diagnostic is a note that should be attached to the
724 * previous (non-note) diagnostic.
725 */
726 CXDiagnostic_Note = 1,
727
728 /**
729 * \brief This diagnostic indicates suspicious code that may not be
730 * wrong.
731 */
732 CXDiagnostic_Warning = 2,
733
734 /**
735 * \brief This diagnostic indicates that the code is ill-formed.
736 */
737 CXDiagnostic_Error = 3,
738
739 /**
740 * \brief This diagnostic indicates that the code is ill-formed such
741 * that future parser recovery is unlikely to produce useful
742 * results.
743 */
744 CXDiagnostic_Fatal = 4
745};
746
747/**
Douglas Gregor4f9c3762010-01-28 00:27:43 +0000748 * \brief A single diagnostic, containing the diagnostic's severity,
749 * location, text, source ranges, and fix-it hints.
750 */
751typedef void *CXDiagnostic;
752
753/**
Ted Kremenekd010ba42011-11-10 08:43:12 +0000754 * \brief A group of CXDiagnostics.
755 */
756typedef void *CXDiagnosticSet;
757
758/**
759 * \brief Determine the number of diagnostics in a CXDiagnosticSet.
760 */
761CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_getNumDiagnosticsInSet(CXDiagnosticSet Diags);
762
763/**
764 * \brief Retrieve a diagnostic associated with the given CXDiagnosticSet.
765 *
James Dennett574cb4c2012-06-15 05:41:51 +0000766 * \param Diags the CXDiagnosticSet to query.
Ted Kremenekd010ba42011-11-10 08:43:12 +0000767 * \param Index the zero-based diagnostic number to retrieve.
768 *
769 * \returns the requested diagnostic. This diagnostic must be freed
770 * via a call to \c clang_disposeDiagnostic().
771 */
772CINDEX_LINKAGE CXDiagnostic clang_getDiagnosticInSet(CXDiagnosticSet Diags,
773 unsigned Index);
774
Ted Kremenekd010ba42011-11-10 08:43:12 +0000775/**
776 * \brief Describes the kind of error that occurred (if any) in a call to
777 * \c clang_loadDiagnostics.
778 */
779enum CXLoadDiag_Error {
780 /**
781 * \brief Indicates that no error occurred.
782 */
783 CXLoadDiag_None = 0,
784
785 /**
786 * \brief Indicates that an unknown error occurred while attempting to
787 * deserialize diagnostics.
788 */
789 CXLoadDiag_Unknown = 1,
790
791 /**
792 * \brief Indicates that the file containing the serialized diagnostics
793 * could not be opened.
794 */
795 CXLoadDiag_CannotLoad = 2,
796
797 /**
798 * \brief Indicates that the serialized diagnostics file is invalid or
James Dennett574cb4c2012-06-15 05:41:51 +0000799 * corrupt.
Ted Kremenekd010ba42011-11-10 08:43:12 +0000800 */
801 CXLoadDiag_InvalidFile = 3
802};
803
804/**
805 * \brief Deserialize a set of diagnostics from a Clang diagnostics bitcode
James Dennett574cb4c2012-06-15 05:41:51 +0000806 * file.
Ted Kremenekd010ba42011-11-10 08:43:12 +0000807 *
James Dennett574cb4c2012-06-15 05:41:51 +0000808 * \param file The name of the file to deserialize.
809 * \param error A pointer to a enum value recording if there was a problem
Ted Kremenekd010ba42011-11-10 08:43:12 +0000810 * deserializing the diagnostics.
James Dennett574cb4c2012-06-15 05:41:51 +0000811 * \param errorString A pointer to a CXString for recording the error string
Ted Kremenekd010ba42011-11-10 08:43:12 +0000812 * if the file was not successfully loaded.
813 *
814 * \returns A loaded CXDiagnosticSet if successful, and NULL otherwise. These
James Dennett574cb4c2012-06-15 05:41:51 +0000815 * diagnostics should be released using clang_disposeDiagnosticSet().
Ted Kremenekd010ba42011-11-10 08:43:12 +0000816 */
817CINDEX_LINKAGE CXDiagnosticSet clang_loadDiagnostics(const char *file,
818 enum CXLoadDiag_Error *error,
819 CXString *errorString);
820
821/**
822 * \brief Release a CXDiagnosticSet and all of its contained diagnostics.
823 */
824CINDEX_LINKAGE void clang_disposeDiagnosticSet(CXDiagnosticSet Diags);
825
826/**
James Dennett574cb4c2012-06-15 05:41:51 +0000827 * \brief Retrieve the child diagnostics of a CXDiagnostic.
828 *
829 * This CXDiagnosticSet does not need to be released by
Sylvestre Ledrud29d97c2013-11-17 09:46:45 +0000830 * clang_disposeDiagnosticSet.
Ted Kremenekd010ba42011-11-10 08:43:12 +0000831 */
832CINDEX_LINKAGE CXDiagnosticSet clang_getChildDiagnostics(CXDiagnostic D);
833
834/**
Douglas Gregor33cdd812010-02-18 18:08:43 +0000835 * \brief Determine the number of diagnostics produced for the given
836 * translation unit.
Douglas Gregor4f9c3762010-01-28 00:27:43 +0000837 */
Douglas Gregor33cdd812010-02-18 18:08:43 +0000838CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_getNumDiagnostics(CXTranslationUnit Unit);
839
840/**
841 * \brief Retrieve a diagnostic associated with the given translation unit.
842 *
843 * \param Unit the translation unit to query.
844 * \param Index the zero-based diagnostic number to retrieve.
845 *
846 * \returns the requested diagnostic. This diagnostic must be freed
847 * via a call to \c clang_disposeDiagnostic().
848 */
849CINDEX_LINKAGE CXDiagnostic clang_getDiagnostic(CXTranslationUnit Unit,
850 unsigned Index);
851
852/**
Ted Kremenekb4a8b052011-12-09 22:28:32 +0000853 * \brief Retrieve the complete set of diagnostics associated with a
854 * translation unit.
855 *
856 * \param Unit the translation unit to query.
857 */
858CINDEX_LINKAGE CXDiagnosticSet
859 clang_getDiagnosticSetFromTU(CXTranslationUnit Unit);
860
861/**
Douglas Gregor33cdd812010-02-18 18:08:43 +0000862 * \brief Destroy a diagnostic.
863 */
864CINDEX_LINKAGE void clang_disposeDiagnostic(CXDiagnostic Diagnostic);
Douglas Gregor4f9c3762010-01-28 00:27:43 +0000865
866/**
Douglas Gregor1e21cc72010-02-18 23:07:20 +0000867 * \brief Options to control the display of diagnostics.
868 *
869 * The values in this enum are meant to be combined to customize the
Sylvestre Ledrud29d97c2013-11-17 09:46:45 +0000870 * behavior of \c clang_formatDiagnostic().
Douglas Gregor1e21cc72010-02-18 23:07:20 +0000871 */
872enum CXDiagnosticDisplayOptions {
873 /**
874 * \brief Display the source-location information where the
875 * diagnostic was located.
876 *
877 * When set, diagnostics will be prefixed by the file, line, and
878 * (optionally) column to which the diagnostic refers. For example,
879 *
880 * \code
881 * test.c:28: warning: extra tokens at end of #endif directive
882 * \endcode
883 *
884 * This option corresponds to the clang flag \c -fshow-source-location.
885 */
886 CXDiagnostic_DisplaySourceLocation = 0x01,
887
888 /**
889 * \brief If displaying the source-location information of the
890 * diagnostic, also include the column number.
891 *
892 * This option corresponds to the clang flag \c -fshow-column.
893 */
894 CXDiagnostic_DisplayColumn = 0x02,
895
896 /**
897 * \brief If displaying the source-location information of the
898 * diagnostic, also include information about source ranges in a
899 * machine-parsable format.
900 *
Ted Kremenekd071c602010-03-13 02:50:34 +0000901 * This option corresponds to the clang flag
Douglas Gregor1e21cc72010-02-18 23:07:20 +0000902 * \c -fdiagnostics-print-source-range-info.
903 */
Douglas Gregora750e8e2010-11-19 16:18:16 +0000904 CXDiagnostic_DisplaySourceRanges = 0x04,
905
906 /**
907 * \brief Display the option name associated with this diagnostic, if any.
908 *
909 * The option name displayed (e.g., -Wconversion) will be placed in brackets
910 * after the diagnostic text. This option corresponds to the clang flag
911 * \c -fdiagnostics-show-option.
912 */
913 CXDiagnostic_DisplayOption = 0x08,
914
915 /**
916 * \brief Display the category number associated with this diagnostic, if any.
917 *
918 * The category number is displayed within brackets after the diagnostic text.
919 * This option corresponds to the clang flag
920 * \c -fdiagnostics-show-category=id.
921 */
922 CXDiagnostic_DisplayCategoryId = 0x10,
923
924 /**
925 * \brief Display the category name associated with this diagnostic, if any.
926 *
927 * The category name is displayed within brackets after the diagnostic text.
928 * This option corresponds to the clang flag
929 * \c -fdiagnostics-show-category=name.
930 */
931 CXDiagnostic_DisplayCategoryName = 0x20
Douglas Gregor1e21cc72010-02-18 23:07:20 +0000932};
933
934/**
Douglas Gregord770f732010-02-22 23:17:23 +0000935 * \brief Format the given diagnostic in a manner that is suitable for display.
Douglas Gregor1e21cc72010-02-18 23:07:20 +0000936 *
Douglas Gregord770f732010-02-22 23:17:23 +0000937 * This routine will format the given diagnostic to a string, rendering
Ted Kremenekd071c602010-03-13 02:50:34 +0000938 * the diagnostic according to the various options given. The
939 * \c clang_defaultDiagnosticDisplayOptions() function returns the set of
Douglas Gregor1e21cc72010-02-18 23:07:20 +0000940 * options that most closely mimics the behavior of the clang compiler.
941 *
942 * \param Diagnostic The diagnostic to print.
943 *
Ted Kremenekd071c602010-03-13 02:50:34 +0000944 * \param Options A set of options that control the diagnostic display,
Douglas Gregor1e21cc72010-02-18 23:07:20 +0000945 * created by combining \c CXDiagnosticDisplayOptions values.
Douglas Gregord770f732010-02-22 23:17:23 +0000946 *
947 * \returns A new string containing for formatted diagnostic.
Douglas Gregor1e21cc72010-02-18 23:07:20 +0000948 */
Douglas Gregord770f732010-02-22 23:17:23 +0000949CINDEX_LINKAGE CXString clang_formatDiagnostic(CXDiagnostic Diagnostic,
950 unsigned Options);
Douglas Gregor1e21cc72010-02-18 23:07:20 +0000951
952/**
953 * \brief Retrieve the set of display options most similar to the
954 * default behavior of the clang compiler.
955 *
956 * \returns A set of display options suitable for use with \c
Sylvestre Ledrud29d97c2013-11-17 09:46:45 +0000957 * clang_formatDiagnostic().
Douglas Gregor1e21cc72010-02-18 23:07:20 +0000958 */
959CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_defaultDiagnosticDisplayOptions(void);
960
961/**
Douglas Gregor4f9c3762010-01-28 00:27:43 +0000962 * \brief Determine the severity of the given diagnostic.
963 */
Ted Kremenekd071c602010-03-13 02:50:34 +0000964CINDEX_LINKAGE enum CXDiagnosticSeverity
Douglas Gregor4f9c3762010-01-28 00:27:43 +0000965clang_getDiagnosticSeverity(CXDiagnostic);
966
967/**
968 * \brief Retrieve the source location of the given diagnostic.
969 *
970 * This location is where Clang would print the caret ('^') when
971 * displaying the diagnostic on the command line.
972 */
973CINDEX_LINKAGE CXSourceLocation clang_getDiagnosticLocation(CXDiagnostic);
974
975/**
976 * \brief Retrieve the text of the given diagnostic.
977 */
978CINDEX_LINKAGE CXString clang_getDiagnosticSpelling(CXDiagnostic);
Douglas Gregor4b8fd6d2010-02-08 23:11:56 +0000979
980/**
Douglas Gregora750e8e2010-11-19 16:18:16 +0000981 * \brief Retrieve the name of the command-line option that enabled this
982 * diagnostic.
983 *
984 * \param Diag The diagnostic to be queried.
985 *
986 * \param Disable If non-NULL, will be set to the option that disables this
987 * diagnostic (if any).
988 *
989 * \returns A string that contains the command-line option used to enable this
990 * warning, such as "-Wconversion" or "-pedantic".
991 */
992CINDEX_LINKAGE CXString clang_getDiagnosticOption(CXDiagnostic Diag,
993 CXString *Disable);
994
995/**
996 * \brief Retrieve the category number for this diagnostic.
997 *
998 * Diagnostics can be categorized into groups along with other, related
999 * diagnostics (e.g., diagnostics under the same warning flag). This routine
1000 * retrieves the category number for the given diagnostic.
1001 *
1002 * \returns The number of the category that contains this diagnostic, or zero
1003 * if this diagnostic is uncategorized.
1004 */
1005CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_getDiagnosticCategory(CXDiagnostic);
1006
1007/**
Ted Kremenek26a6d492012-04-12 00:03:31 +00001008 * \brief Retrieve the name of a particular diagnostic category. This
1009 * is now deprecated. Use clang_getDiagnosticCategoryText()
1010 * instead.
Douglas Gregora750e8e2010-11-19 16:18:16 +00001011 *
1012 * \param Category A diagnostic category number, as returned by
1013 * \c clang_getDiagnosticCategory().
1014 *
1015 * \returns The name of the given diagnostic category.
1016 */
Ted Kremenek26a6d492012-04-12 00:03:31 +00001017CINDEX_DEPRECATED CINDEX_LINKAGE
1018CXString clang_getDiagnosticCategoryName(unsigned Category);
1019
1020/**
1021 * \brief Retrieve the diagnostic category text for a given diagnostic.
1022 *
Ted Kremenek26a6d492012-04-12 00:03:31 +00001023 * \returns The text of the given diagnostic category.
1024 */
1025CINDEX_LINKAGE CXString clang_getDiagnosticCategoryText(CXDiagnostic);
Douglas Gregora750e8e2010-11-19 16:18:16 +00001026
1027/**
Douglas Gregor4b8fd6d2010-02-08 23:11:56 +00001028 * \brief Determine the number of source ranges associated with the given
1029 * diagnostic.
1030 */
1031CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_getDiagnosticNumRanges(CXDiagnostic);
Ted Kremenekd071c602010-03-13 02:50:34 +00001032
Douglas Gregor4f9c3762010-01-28 00:27:43 +00001033/**
Douglas Gregor4b8fd6d2010-02-08 23:11:56 +00001034 * \brief Retrieve a source range associated with the diagnostic.
Douglas Gregor4f9c3762010-01-28 00:27:43 +00001035 *
Douglas Gregor4b8fd6d2010-02-08 23:11:56 +00001036 * A diagnostic's source ranges highlight important elements in the source
Douglas Gregor4f9c3762010-01-28 00:27:43 +00001037 * code. On the command line, Clang displays source ranges by
Ted Kremenekd071c602010-03-13 02:50:34 +00001038 * underlining them with '~' characters.
Douglas Gregor4f9c3762010-01-28 00:27:43 +00001039 *
Douglas Gregor4b8fd6d2010-02-08 23:11:56 +00001040 * \param Diagnostic the diagnostic whose range is being extracted.
Douglas Gregor4f9c3762010-01-28 00:27:43 +00001041 *
Ted Kremenekd071c602010-03-13 02:50:34 +00001042 * \param Range the zero-based index specifying which range to
Douglas Gregor4f9c3762010-01-28 00:27:43 +00001043 *
Douglas Gregor4b8fd6d2010-02-08 23:11:56 +00001044 * \returns the requested source range.
Douglas Gregor4f9c3762010-01-28 00:27:43 +00001045 */
Ted Kremenekd071c602010-03-13 02:50:34 +00001046CINDEX_LINKAGE CXSourceRange clang_getDiagnosticRange(CXDiagnostic Diagnostic,
Douglas Gregor4b8fd6d2010-02-08 23:11:56 +00001047 unsigned Range);
Douglas Gregor4f9c3762010-01-28 00:27:43 +00001048
1049/**
1050 * \brief Determine the number of fix-it hints associated with the
1051 * given diagnostic.
1052 */
1053CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_getDiagnosticNumFixIts(CXDiagnostic Diagnostic);
1054
1055/**
Douglas Gregor836ec942010-02-19 18:16:06 +00001056 * \brief Retrieve the replacement information for a given fix-it.
Douglas Gregor4f9c3762010-01-28 00:27:43 +00001057 *
Douglas Gregor836ec942010-02-19 18:16:06 +00001058 * Fix-its are described in terms of a source range whose contents
1059 * should be replaced by a string. This approach generalizes over
1060 * three kinds of operations: removal of source code (the range covers
1061 * the code to be removed and the replacement string is empty),
1062 * replacement of source code (the range covers the code to be
1063 * replaced and the replacement string provides the new code), and
1064 * insertion (both the start and end of the range point at the
1065 * insertion location, and the replacement string provides the text to
1066 * insert).
Douglas Gregor4f9c3762010-01-28 00:27:43 +00001067 *
Douglas Gregor836ec942010-02-19 18:16:06 +00001068 * \param Diagnostic The diagnostic whose fix-its are being queried.
1069 *
1070 * \param FixIt The zero-based index of the fix-it.
1071 *
1072 * \param ReplacementRange The source range whose contents will be
1073 * replaced with the returned replacement string. Note that source
1074 * ranges are half-open ranges [a, b), so the source code should be
1075 * replaced from a and up to (but not including) b.
1076 *
1077 * \returns A string containing text that should be replace the source
1078 * code indicated by the \c ReplacementRange.
Douglas Gregor4f9c3762010-01-28 00:27:43 +00001079 */
Ted Kremenekd071c602010-03-13 02:50:34 +00001080CINDEX_LINKAGE CXString clang_getDiagnosticFixIt(CXDiagnostic Diagnostic,
Douglas Gregor836ec942010-02-19 18:16:06 +00001081 unsigned FixIt,
1082 CXSourceRange *ReplacementRange);
Douglas Gregor4f9c3762010-01-28 00:27:43 +00001083
1084/**
1085 * @}
1086 */
1087
1088/**
1089 * \defgroup CINDEX_TRANSLATION_UNIT Translation unit manipulation
1090 *
1091 * The routines in this group provide the ability to create and destroy
1092 * translation units from files, either by parsing the contents of the files or
1093 * by reading in a serialized representation of a translation unit.
1094 *
1095 * @{
1096 */
Ted Kremenekd071c602010-03-13 02:50:34 +00001097
Douglas Gregor4f9c3762010-01-28 00:27:43 +00001098/**
1099 * \brief Get the original translation unit source file name.
1100 */
1101CINDEX_LINKAGE CXString
1102clang_getTranslationUnitSpelling(CXTranslationUnit CTUnit);
1103
1104/**
1105 * \brief Return the CXTranslationUnit for a given source file and the provided
1106 * command line arguments one would pass to the compiler.
1107 *
1108 * Note: The 'source_filename' argument is optional. If the caller provides a
1109 * NULL pointer, the name of the source file is expected to reside in the
1110 * specified command line arguments.
1111 *
1112 * Note: When encountered in 'clang_command_line_args', the following options
1113 * are ignored:
1114 *
1115 * '-c'
1116 * '-emit-ast'
1117 * '-fsyntax-only'
James Dennett574cb4c2012-06-15 05:41:51 +00001118 * '-o \<output file>' (both '-o' and '\<output file>' are ignored)
Douglas Gregor4f9c3762010-01-28 00:27:43 +00001119 *
Ted Kremenekbd4972442010-11-08 04:28:51 +00001120 * \param CIdx The index object with which the translation unit will be
1121 * associated.
Douglas Gregor4f9c3762010-01-28 00:27:43 +00001122 *
James Dennett574cb4c2012-06-15 05:41:51 +00001123 * \param source_filename The name of the source file to load, or NULL if the
Ted Kremenekbd4972442010-11-08 04:28:51 +00001124 * source file is included in \p clang_command_line_args.
1125 *
1126 * \param num_clang_command_line_args The number of command-line arguments in
1127 * \p clang_command_line_args.
1128 *
1129 * \param clang_command_line_args The command-line arguments that would be
1130 * passed to the \c clang executable if it were being invoked out-of-process.
1131 * These command-line options will be parsed and will affect how the translation
1132 * unit is parsed. Note that the following options are ignored: '-c',
James Dennett574cb4c2012-06-15 05:41:51 +00001133 * '-emit-ast', '-fsyntax-only' (which is the default), and '-o \<output file>'.
Douglas Gregor4f9c3762010-01-28 00:27:43 +00001134 *
1135 * \param num_unsaved_files the number of unsaved file entries in \p
1136 * unsaved_files.
1137 *
1138 * \param unsaved_files the files that have not yet been saved to disk
1139 * but may be required for code completion, including the contents of
Ted Kremenekde24a942010-04-12 18:47:26 +00001140 * those files. The contents and name of these files (as specified by
1141 * CXUnsavedFile) are copied when necessary, so the client only needs to
1142 * guarantee their validity until the call to this function returns.
Douglas Gregor4f9c3762010-01-28 00:27:43 +00001143 */
1144CINDEX_LINKAGE CXTranslationUnit clang_createTranslationUnitFromSourceFile(
1145 CXIndex CIdx,
1146 const char *source_filename,
1147 int num_clang_command_line_args,
Douglas Gregor57879fa2010-09-01 16:43:19 +00001148 const char * const *clang_command_line_args,
Douglas Gregor4f9c3762010-01-28 00:27:43 +00001149 unsigned num_unsaved_files,
Douglas Gregor33cdd812010-02-18 18:08:43 +00001150 struct CXUnsavedFile *unsaved_files);
Ted Kremenekd071c602010-03-13 02:50:34 +00001151
Douglas Gregor4f9c3762010-01-28 00:27:43 +00001152/**
Dmitri Gribenkoea4d1c32014-02-12 19:12:37 +00001153 * \brief Same as \c clang_createTranslationUnit2, but returns
1154 * the \c CXTranslationUnit instead of an error code. In case of an error this
1155 * routine returns a \c NULL \c CXTranslationUnit, without further detailed
1156 * error codes.
Douglas Gregor4f9c3762010-01-28 00:27:43 +00001157 */
Dmitri Gribenkoea4d1c32014-02-12 19:12:37 +00001158CINDEX_LINKAGE CXTranslationUnit clang_createTranslationUnit(
1159 CXIndex CIdx,
1160 const char *ast_filename);
1161
1162/**
1163 * \brief Create a translation unit from an AST file (\c -emit-ast).
1164 *
1165 * \param[out] out_TU A non-NULL pointer to store the created
1166 * \c CXTranslationUnit.
1167 *
1168 * \returns Zero on success, otherwise returns an error code.
1169 */
1170CINDEX_LINKAGE enum CXErrorCode clang_createTranslationUnit2(
1171 CXIndex CIdx,
1172 const char *ast_filename,
1173 CXTranslationUnit *out_TU);
Douglas Gregor4f9c3762010-01-28 00:27:43 +00001174
Douglas Gregorbe2d8c62010-07-23 00:33:23 +00001175/**
1176 * \brief Flags that control the creation of translation units.
1177 *
1178 * The enumerators in this enumeration type are meant to be bitwise
1179 * ORed together to specify which options should be used when
1180 * constructing the translation unit.
1181 */
Douglas Gregor99d2cf42010-07-21 18:52:53 +00001182enum CXTranslationUnit_Flags {
1183 /**
1184 * \brief Used to indicate that no special translation-unit options are
1185 * needed.
1186 */
1187 CXTranslationUnit_None = 0x0,
1188
1189 /**
1190 * \brief Used to indicate that the parser should construct a "detailed"
1191 * preprocessing record, including all macro definitions and instantiations.
1192 *
1193 * Constructing a detailed preprocessing record requires more memory
1194 * and time to parse, since the information contained in the record
1195 * is usually not retained. However, it can be useful for
1196 * applications that require more detailed information about the
1197 * behavior of the preprocessor.
1198 */
Douglas Gregorbe2d8c62010-07-23 00:33:23 +00001199 CXTranslationUnit_DetailedPreprocessingRecord = 0x01,
1200
1201 /**
Douglas Gregor4a47bca2010-08-09 22:28:58 +00001202 * \brief Used to indicate that the translation unit is incomplete.
Douglas Gregorbe2d8c62010-07-23 00:33:23 +00001203 *
Douglas Gregor4a47bca2010-08-09 22:28:58 +00001204 * When a translation unit is considered "incomplete", semantic
1205 * analysis that is typically performed at the end of the
1206 * translation unit will be suppressed. For example, this suppresses
1207 * the completion of tentative declarations in C and of
1208 * instantiation of implicitly-instantiation function templates in
1209 * C++. This option is typically used when parsing a header with the
1210 * intent of producing a precompiled header.
Douglas Gregorbe2d8c62010-07-23 00:33:23 +00001211 */
Douglas Gregor4a47bca2010-08-09 22:28:58 +00001212 CXTranslationUnit_Incomplete = 0x02,
Douglas Gregorbe2d8c62010-07-23 00:33:23 +00001213
1214 /**
1215 * \brief Used to indicate that the translation unit should be built with an
1216 * implicit precompiled header for the preamble.
1217 *
1218 * An implicit precompiled header is used as an optimization when a
1219 * particular translation unit is likely to be reparsed many times
1220 * when the sources aren't changing that often. In this case, an
1221 * implicit precompiled header will be built containing all of the
1222 * initial includes at the top of the main file (what we refer to as
1223 * the "preamble" of the file). In subsequent parses, if the
1224 * preamble or the files in it have not changed, \c
1225 * clang_reparseTranslationUnit() will re-use the implicit
1226 * precompiled header to improve parsing performance.
1227 */
Douglas Gregorde051182010-08-11 15:58:42 +00001228 CXTranslationUnit_PrecompiledPreamble = 0x04,
1229
1230 /**
1231 * \brief Used to indicate that the translation unit should cache some
1232 * code-completion results with each reparse of the source file.
1233 *
1234 * Caching of code-completion results is a performance optimization that
1235 * introduces some overhead to reparsing but improves the performance of
1236 * code-completion operations.
1237 */
Douglas Gregorf5a18542010-10-27 17:24:53 +00001238 CXTranslationUnit_CacheCompletionResults = 0x08,
Argyrios Kyrtzidis0db720f2012-10-11 16:05:00 +00001239
Douglas Gregorf5a18542010-10-27 17:24:53 +00001240 /**
Argyrios Kyrtzidis0db720f2012-10-11 16:05:00 +00001241 * \brief Used to indicate that the translation unit will be serialized with
1242 * \c clang_saveTranslationUnit.
Douglas Gregorf5a18542010-10-27 17:24:53 +00001243 *
Argyrios Kyrtzidis0db720f2012-10-11 16:05:00 +00001244 * This option is typically used when parsing a header with the intent of
1245 * producing a precompiled header.
Douglas Gregorf5a18542010-10-27 17:24:53 +00001246 */
Argyrios Kyrtzidis0db720f2012-10-11 16:05:00 +00001247 CXTranslationUnit_ForSerialization = 0x10,
Douglas Gregorf5a18542010-10-27 17:24:53 +00001248
1249 /**
Douglas Gregor2ed0ee12011-08-25 22:54:01 +00001250 * \brief DEPRECATED: Enabled chained precompiled preambles in C++.
Douglas Gregorf5a18542010-10-27 17:24:53 +00001251 *
1252 * Note: this is a *temporary* option that is available only while
Douglas Gregor2ed0ee12011-08-25 22:54:01 +00001253 * we are testing C++ precompiled preamble support. It is deprecated.
Douglas Gregorf5a18542010-10-27 17:24:53 +00001254 */
Erik Verbruggen6e922512012-04-12 10:11:59 +00001255 CXTranslationUnit_CXXChainedPCH = 0x20,
1256
1257 /**
1258 * \brief Used to indicate that function/method bodies should be skipped while
1259 * parsing.
1260 *
1261 * This option can be used to search for declarations/definitions while
1262 * ignoring the usages.
1263 */
Dmitri Gribenko3292d062012-07-02 17:35:10 +00001264 CXTranslationUnit_SkipFunctionBodies = 0x40,
1265
1266 /**
1267 * \brief Used to indicate that brief documentation comments should be
1268 * included into the set of code completions returned from this translation
1269 * unit.
1270 */
Benjamin Kramer5c248d82015-12-15 09:30:31 +00001271 CXTranslationUnit_IncludeBriefCommentsInCodeCompletion = 0x80,
1272
1273 /**
1274 * \brief Used to indicate that the precompiled preamble should be created on
1275 * the first parse. Otherwise it will be created on the first reparse. This
1276 * trades runtime on the first parse (serializing the preamble takes time) for
1277 * reduced runtime on the second parse (can now reuse the preamble).
1278 */
Manuel Klimek016c0242016-03-01 10:56:19 +00001279 CXTranslationUnit_CreatePreambleOnFirstParse = 0x100,
1280
1281 /**
1282 * \brief Do not stop processing when fatal errors are encountered.
1283 *
1284 * When fatal errors are encountered while parsing a translation unit,
1285 * semantic analysis is typically stopped early when compiling code. A common
1286 * source for fatal errors are unresolvable include files. For the
1287 * purposes of an IDE, this is undesirable behavior and as much information
1288 * as possible should be reported. Use this flag to enable this behavior.
1289 */
Argyrios Kyrtzidis735e92c2017-06-09 01:20:48 +00001290 CXTranslationUnit_KeepGoing = 0x200,
1291
1292 /**
1293 * \brief Sets the preprocessor in a mode for parsing a single file only.
1294 */
1295 CXTranslationUnit_SingleFileParse = 0x400
Douglas Gregor99d2cf42010-07-21 18:52:53 +00001296};
1297
1298/**
Douglas Gregor4a47bca2010-08-09 22:28:58 +00001299 * \brief Returns the set of flags that is suitable for parsing a translation
1300 * unit that is being edited.
1301 *
1302 * The set of flags returned provide options for \c clang_parseTranslationUnit()
1303 * to indicate that the translation unit is likely to be reparsed many times,
1304 * either explicitly (via \c clang_reparseTranslationUnit()) or implicitly
1305 * (e.g., by code completion (\c clang_codeCompletionAt())). The returned flag
1306 * set contains an unspecified set of optimizations (e.g., the precompiled
1307 * preamble) geared toward improving the performance of these routines. The
1308 * set of optimizations enabled may change from one version to the next.
1309 */
Douglas Gregorde051182010-08-11 15:58:42 +00001310CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_defaultEditingTranslationUnitOptions(void);
Dmitri Gribenkoea4d1c32014-02-12 19:12:37 +00001311
1312/**
1313 * \brief Same as \c clang_parseTranslationUnit2, but returns
1314 * the \c CXTranslationUnit instead of an error code. In case of an error this
1315 * routine returns a \c NULL \c CXTranslationUnit, without further detailed
1316 * error codes.
1317 */
1318CINDEX_LINKAGE CXTranslationUnit
1319clang_parseTranslationUnit(CXIndex CIdx,
1320 const char *source_filename,
1321 const char *const *command_line_args,
1322 int num_command_line_args,
1323 struct CXUnsavedFile *unsaved_files,
1324 unsigned num_unsaved_files,
1325 unsigned options);
1326
Douglas Gregor4a47bca2010-08-09 22:28:58 +00001327/**
Douglas Gregor99d2cf42010-07-21 18:52:53 +00001328 * \brief Parse the given source file and the translation unit corresponding
1329 * to that file.
1330 *
1331 * This routine is the main entry point for the Clang C API, providing the
1332 * ability to parse a source file into a translation unit that can then be
1333 * queried by other functions in the API. This routine accepts a set of
1334 * command-line arguments so that the compilation can be configured in the same
1335 * way that the compiler is configured on the command line.
1336 *
1337 * \param CIdx The index object with which the translation unit will be
1338 * associated.
1339 *
1340 * \param source_filename The name of the source file to load, or NULL if the
Dmitri Gribenkoea4d1c32014-02-12 19:12:37 +00001341 * source file is included in \c command_line_args.
Douglas Gregor99d2cf42010-07-21 18:52:53 +00001342 *
1343 * \param command_line_args The command-line arguments that would be
1344 * passed to the \c clang executable if it were being invoked out-of-process.
1345 * These command-line options will be parsed and will affect how the translation
1346 * unit is parsed. Note that the following options are ignored: '-c',
James Dennett574cb4c2012-06-15 05:41:51 +00001347 * '-emit-ast', '-fsyntax-only' (which is the default), and '-o \<output file>'.
Douglas Gregor99d2cf42010-07-21 18:52:53 +00001348 *
1349 * \param num_command_line_args The number of command-line arguments in
Dmitri Gribenkoea4d1c32014-02-12 19:12:37 +00001350 * \c command_line_args.
Douglas Gregor99d2cf42010-07-21 18:52:53 +00001351 *
1352 * \param unsaved_files the files that have not yet been saved to disk
Douglas Gregor8e984da2010-08-04 16:47:14 +00001353 * but may be required for parsing, including the contents of
Douglas Gregor99d2cf42010-07-21 18:52:53 +00001354 * those files. The contents and name of these files (as specified by
1355 * CXUnsavedFile) are copied when necessary, so the client only needs to
1356 * guarantee their validity until the call to this function returns.
1357 *
1358 * \param num_unsaved_files the number of unsaved file entries in \p
1359 * unsaved_files.
1360 *
1361 * \param options A bitmask of options that affects how the translation unit
1362 * is managed but not its compilation. This should be a bitwise OR of the
1363 * CXTranslationUnit_XXX flags.
1364 *
Dmitri Gribenkoea4d1c32014-02-12 19:12:37 +00001365 * \param[out] out_TU A non-NULL pointer to store the created
1366 * \c CXTranslationUnit, describing the parsed code and containing any
1367 * diagnostics produced by the compiler.
1368 *
1369 * \returns Zero on success, otherwise returns an error code.
Douglas Gregor99d2cf42010-07-21 18:52:53 +00001370 */
Dmitri Gribenkoea4d1c32014-02-12 19:12:37 +00001371CINDEX_LINKAGE enum CXErrorCode
1372clang_parseTranslationUnit2(CXIndex CIdx,
1373 const char *source_filename,
1374 const char *const *command_line_args,
1375 int num_command_line_args,
1376 struct CXUnsavedFile *unsaved_files,
1377 unsigned num_unsaved_files,
1378 unsigned options,
1379 CXTranslationUnit *out_TU);
1380
Douglas Gregor4f9c3762010-01-28 00:27:43 +00001381/**
Benjamin Kramerc02670e2015-11-18 16:14:27 +00001382 * \brief Same as clang_parseTranslationUnit2 but requires a full command line
1383 * for \c command_line_args including argv[0]. This is useful if the standard
1384 * library paths are relative to the binary.
1385 */
1386CINDEX_LINKAGE enum CXErrorCode clang_parseTranslationUnit2FullArgv(
1387 CXIndex CIdx, const char *source_filename,
1388 const char *const *command_line_args, int num_command_line_args,
1389 struct CXUnsavedFile *unsaved_files, unsigned num_unsaved_files,
1390 unsigned options, CXTranslationUnit *out_TU);
1391
1392/**
Douglas Gregor6bb92ec2010-08-13 15:35:05 +00001393 * \brief Flags that control how translation units are saved.
1394 *
1395 * The enumerators in this enumeration type are meant to be bitwise
1396 * ORed together to specify which options should be used when
1397 * saving the translation unit.
1398 */
1399enum CXSaveTranslationUnit_Flags {
1400 /**
1401 * \brief Used to indicate that no special saving options are needed.
1402 */
1403 CXSaveTranslationUnit_None = 0x0
1404};
1405
1406/**
1407 * \brief Returns the set of flags that is suitable for saving a translation
1408 * unit.
1409 *
1410 * The set of flags returned provide options for
1411 * \c clang_saveTranslationUnit() by default. The returned flag
1412 * set contains an unspecified set of options that save translation units with
1413 * the most commonly-requested data.
1414 */
1415CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_defaultSaveOptions(CXTranslationUnit TU);
1416
1417/**
Douglas Gregor30c80fa2011-07-06 16:43:36 +00001418 * \brief Describes the kind of error that occurred (if any) in a call to
1419 * \c clang_saveTranslationUnit().
1420 */
1421enum CXSaveError {
1422 /**
1423 * \brief Indicates that no error occurred while saving a translation unit.
1424 */
1425 CXSaveError_None = 0,
1426
1427 /**
1428 * \brief Indicates that an unknown error occurred while attempting to save
1429 * the file.
1430 *
1431 * This error typically indicates that file I/O failed when attempting to
1432 * write the file.
1433 */
1434 CXSaveError_Unknown = 1,
1435
1436 /**
1437 * \brief Indicates that errors during translation prevented this attempt
1438 * to save the translation unit.
1439 *
1440 * Errors that prevent the translation unit from being saved can be
1441 * extracted using \c clang_getNumDiagnostics() and \c clang_getDiagnostic().
1442 */
1443 CXSaveError_TranslationErrors = 2,
1444
1445 /**
1446 * \brief Indicates that the translation unit to be saved was somehow
1447 * invalid (e.g., NULL).
1448 */
1449 CXSaveError_InvalidTU = 3
1450};
1451
1452/**
Douglas Gregore9386682010-08-13 05:36:37 +00001453 * \brief Saves a translation unit into a serialized representation of
1454 * that translation unit on disk.
1455 *
1456 * Any translation unit that was parsed without error can be saved
1457 * into a file. The translation unit can then be deserialized into a
1458 * new \c CXTranslationUnit with \c clang_createTranslationUnit() or,
1459 * if it is an incomplete translation unit that corresponds to a
1460 * header, used as a precompiled header when parsing other translation
1461 * units.
1462 *
1463 * \param TU The translation unit to save.
Douglas Gregor6bb92ec2010-08-13 15:35:05 +00001464 *
Douglas Gregore9386682010-08-13 05:36:37 +00001465 * \param FileName The file to which the translation unit will be saved.
1466 *
Douglas Gregor6bb92ec2010-08-13 15:35:05 +00001467 * \param options A bitmask of options that affects how the translation unit
1468 * is saved. This should be a bitwise OR of the
1469 * CXSaveTranslationUnit_XXX flags.
1470 *
Douglas Gregor30c80fa2011-07-06 16:43:36 +00001471 * \returns A value that will match one of the enumerators of the CXSaveError
1472 * enumeration. Zero (CXSaveError_None) indicates that the translation unit was
1473 * saved successfully, while a non-zero value indicates that a problem occurred.
Douglas Gregore9386682010-08-13 05:36:37 +00001474 */
1475CINDEX_LINKAGE int clang_saveTranslationUnit(CXTranslationUnit TU,
Douglas Gregor6bb92ec2010-08-13 15:35:05 +00001476 const char *FileName,
1477 unsigned options);
Douglas Gregore9386682010-08-13 05:36:37 +00001478
1479/**
Erik Verbruggen346066b2017-05-30 14:25:54 +00001480 * \brief Suspend a translation unit in order to free memory associated with it.
1481 *
1482 * A suspended translation unit uses significantly less memory but on the other
1483 * side does not support any other calls than \c clang_reparseTranslationUnit
1484 * to resume it or \c clang_disposeTranslationUnit to dispose it completely.
1485 */
1486CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_suspendTranslationUnit(CXTranslationUnit);
1487
1488/**
Douglas Gregor4f9c3762010-01-28 00:27:43 +00001489 * \brief Destroy the specified CXTranslationUnit object.
1490 */
1491CINDEX_LINKAGE void clang_disposeTranslationUnit(CXTranslationUnit);
Ted Kremenekd071c602010-03-13 02:50:34 +00001492
Douglas Gregor4f9c3762010-01-28 00:27:43 +00001493/**
Douglas Gregorde051182010-08-11 15:58:42 +00001494 * \brief Flags that control the reparsing of translation units.
1495 *
1496 * The enumerators in this enumeration type are meant to be bitwise
1497 * ORed together to specify which options should be used when
1498 * reparsing the translation unit.
1499 */
1500enum CXReparse_Flags {
1501 /**
1502 * \brief Used to indicate that no special reparsing options are needed.
1503 */
1504 CXReparse_None = 0x0
1505};
1506
1507/**
1508 * \brief Returns the set of flags that is suitable for reparsing a translation
1509 * unit.
1510 *
1511 * The set of flags returned provide options for
1512 * \c clang_reparseTranslationUnit() by default. The returned flag
1513 * set contains an unspecified set of optimizations geared toward common uses
1514 * of reparsing. The set of optimizations enabled may change from one version
1515 * to the next.
1516 */
1517CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_defaultReparseOptions(CXTranslationUnit TU);
1518
1519/**
Douglas Gregoraa21cc42010-07-19 21:46:24 +00001520 * \brief Reparse the source files that produced this translation unit.
1521 *
1522 * This routine can be used to re-parse the source files that originally
1523 * created the given translation unit, for example because those source files
1524 * have changed (either on disk or as passed via \p unsaved_files). The
1525 * source code will be reparsed with the same command-line options as it
1526 * was originally parsed.
1527 *
1528 * Reparsing a translation unit invalidates all cursors and source locations
1529 * that refer into that translation unit. This makes reparsing a translation
1530 * unit semantically equivalent to destroying the translation unit and then
1531 * creating a new translation unit with the same command-line arguments.
1532 * However, it may be more efficient to reparse a translation
1533 * unit using this routine.
1534 *
1535 * \param TU The translation unit whose contents will be re-parsed. The
1536 * translation unit must originally have been built with
1537 * \c clang_createTranslationUnitFromSourceFile().
1538 *
1539 * \param num_unsaved_files The number of unsaved file entries in \p
1540 * unsaved_files.
1541 *
1542 * \param unsaved_files The files that have not yet been saved to disk
1543 * but may be required for parsing, including the contents of
1544 * those files. The contents and name of these files (as specified by
1545 * CXUnsavedFile) are copied when necessary, so the client only needs to
1546 * guarantee their validity until the call to this function returns.
1547 *
Douglas Gregorde051182010-08-11 15:58:42 +00001548 * \param options A bitset of options composed of the flags in CXReparse_Flags.
1549 * The function \c clang_defaultReparseOptions() produces a default set of
1550 * options recommended for most uses, based on the translation unit.
1551 *
Dmitri Gribenkoea4d1c32014-02-12 19:12:37 +00001552 * \returns 0 if the sources could be reparsed. A non-zero error code will be
Douglas Gregoraa21cc42010-07-19 21:46:24 +00001553 * returned if reparsing was impossible, such that the translation unit is
Dmitri Gribenkoea4d1c32014-02-12 19:12:37 +00001554 * invalid. In such cases, the only valid call for \c TU is
1555 * \c clang_disposeTranslationUnit(TU). The error codes returned by this
1556 * routine are described by the \c CXErrorCode enum.
Douglas Gregoraa21cc42010-07-19 21:46:24 +00001557 */
1558CINDEX_LINKAGE int clang_reparseTranslationUnit(CXTranslationUnit TU,
1559 unsigned num_unsaved_files,
Douglas Gregorde051182010-08-11 15:58:42 +00001560 struct CXUnsavedFile *unsaved_files,
1561 unsigned options);
Ted Kremenek83f642e2011-04-18 22:47:10 +00001562
1563/**
1564 * \brief Categorizes how memory is being used by a translation unit.
1565 */
Ted Kremenek23324122011-04-20 16:41:07 +00001566enum CXTUResourceUsageKind {
1567 CXTUResourceUsage_AST = 1,
1568 CXTUResourceUsage_Identifiers = 2,
1569 CXTUResourceUsage_Selectors = 3,
1570 CXTUResourceUsage_GlobalCompletionResults = 4,
Ted Kremenek21735e62011-04-28 04:10:31 +00001571 CXTUResourceUsage_SourceManagerContentCache = 5,
Ted Kremenekf5df0ce2011-04-28 04:53:38 +00001572 CXTUResourceUsage_AST_SideTables = 6,
Ted Kremenek8d587902011-04-28 20:36:42 +00001573 CXTUResourceUsage_SourceManager_Membuffer_Malloc = 7,
Ted Kremenek5e1ed7b2011-04-28 23:46:20 +00001574 CXTUResourceUsage_SourceManager_Membuffer_MMap = 8,
1575 CXTUResourceUsage_ExternalASTSource_Membuffer_Malloc = 9,
1576 CXTUResourceUsage_ExternalASTSource_Membuffer_MMap = 10,
Ted Kremenek2160a0d2011-05-04 01:38:46 +00001577 CXTUResourceUsage_Preprocessor = 11,
1578 CXTUResourceUsage_PreprocessingRecord = 12,
Ted Kremenek120992a2011-07-26 23:46:06 +00001579 CXTUResourceUsage_SourceManager_DataStructures = 13,
Ted Kremenekfbcce6f2011-07-26 23:46:11 +00001580 CXTUResourceUsage_Preprocessor_HeaderSearch = 14,
Ted Kremenek23324122011-04-20 16:41:07 +00001581 CXTUResourceUsage_MEMORY_IN_BYTES_BEGIN = CXTUResourceUsage_AST,
1582 CXTUResourceUsage_MEMORY_IN_BYTES_END =
Ted Kremenekfbcce6f2011-07-26 23:46:11 +00001583 CXTUResourceUsage_Preprocessor_HeaderSearch,
Ted Kremenek23324122011-04-20 16:41:07 +00001584
1585 CXTUResourceUsage_First = CXTUResourceUsage_AST,
Ted Kremenekfbcce6f2011-07-26 23:46:11 +00001586 CXTUResourceUsage_Last = CXTUResourceUsage_Preprocessor_HeaderSearch
Ted Kremenek83f642e2011-04-18 22:47:10 +00001587};
1588
1589/**
1590 * \brief Returns the human-readable null-terminated C string that represents
Ted Kremenek23324122011-04-20 16:41:07 +00001591 * the name of the memory category. This string should never be freed.
Ted Kremenek83f642e2011-04-18 22:47:10 +00001592 */
1593CINDEX_LINKAGE
Ted Kremenek23324122011-04-20 16:41:07 +00001594const char *clang_getTUResourceUsageName(enum CXTUResourceUsageKind kind);
Ted Kremenek83f642e2011-04-18 22:47:10 +00001595
Ted Kremenek23324122011-04-20 16:41:07 +00001596typedef struct CXTUResourceUsageEntry {
Ted Kremenek83f642e2011-04-18 22:47:10 +00001597 /* \brief The memory usage category. */
Ted Kremenek23324122011-04-20 16:41:07 +00001598 enum CXTUResourceUsageKind kind;
1599 /* \brief Amount of resources used.
1600 The units will depend on the resource kind. */
Ted Kremenek83f642e2011-04-18 22:47:10 +00001601 unsigned long amount;
Ted Kremenek23324122011-04-20 16:41:07 +00001602} CXTUResourceUsageEntry;
Ted Kremenek83f642e2011-04-18 22:47:10 +00001603
1604/**
1605 * \brief The memory usage of a CXTranslationUnit, broken into categories.
1606 */
Ted Kremenek23324122011-04-20 16:41:07 +00001607typedef struct CXTUResourceUsage {
Ted Kremenek83f642e2011-04-18 22:47:10 +00001608 /* \brief Private data member, used for queries. */
1609 void *data;
1610
1611 /* \brief The number of entries in the 'entries' array. */
1612 unsigned numEntries;
1613
1614 /* \brief An array of key-value pairs, representing the breakdown of memory
1615 usage. */
Ted Kremenek23324122011-04-20 16:41:07 +00001616 CXTUResourceUsageEntry *entries;
Ted Kremenek83f642e2011-04-18 22:47:10 +00001617
Ted Kremenek23324122011-04-20 16:41:07 +00001618} CXTUResourceUsage;
Ted Kremenek83f642e2011-04-18 22:47:10 +00001619
1620/**
1621 * \brief Return the memory usage of a translation unit. This object
Ted Kremenek23324122011-04-20 16:41:07 +00001622 * should be released with clang_disposeCXTUResourceUsage().
Ted Kremenek83f642e2011-04-18 22:47:10 +00001623 */
Ted Kremenek23324122011-04-20 16:41:07 +00001624CINDEX_LINKAGE CXTUResourceUsage clang_getCXTUResourceUsage(CXTranslationUnit TU);
Ted Kremenek83f642e2011-04-18 22:47:10 +00001625
Ted Kremenek23324122011-04-20 16:41:07 +00001626CINDEX_LINKAGE void clang_disposeCXTUResourceUsage(CXTUResourceUsage usage);
Ted Kremenek83f642e2011-04-18 22:47:10 +00001627
Douglas Gregoraa21cc42010-07-19 21:46:24 +00001628/**
Emilio Cobos Alvarez485ad422017-04-28 15:56:39 +00001629 * \brief Get target information for this translation unit.
1630 *
1631 * The CXTargetInfo object cannot outlive the CXTranslationUnit object.
1632 */
1633CINDEX_LINKAGE CXTargetInfo
1634clang_getTranslationUnitTargetInfo(CXTranslationUnit CTUnit);
1635
1636/**
1637 * \brief Destroy the CXTargetInfo object.
1638 */
1639CINDEX_LINKAGE void
1640clang_TargetInfo_dispose(CXTargetInfo Info);
1641
1642/**
1643 * \brief Get the normalized target triple as a string.
1644 *
1645 * Returns the empty string in case of any error.
1646 */
1647CINDEX_LINKAGE CXString
1648clang_TargetInfo_getTriple(CXTargetInfo Info);
1649
1650/**
1651 * \brief Get the pointer width of the target in bits.
1652 *
1653 * Returns -1 in case of error.
1654 */
1655CINDEX_LINKAGE int
1656clang_TargetInfo_getPointerWidth(CXTargetInfo Info);
1657
1658/**
Douglas Gregor4f9c3762010-01-28 00:27:43 +00001659 * @}
1660 */
Ted Kremenekd071c602010-03-13 02:50:34 +00001661
Douglas Gregor4f9c3762010-01-28 00:27:43 +00001662/**
Douglas Gregor6007cf22010-01-22 22:29:16 +00001663 * \brief Describes the kind of entity that a cursor refers to.
1664 */
1665enum CXCursorKind {
1666 /* Declarations */
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00001667 /**
Douglas Gregor6007cf22010-01-22 22:29:16 +00001668 * \brief A declaration whose specific kind is not exposed via this
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00001669 * interface.
Douglas Gregor6007cf22010-01-22 22:29:16 +00001670 *
1671 * Unexposed declarations have the same operations as any other kind
1672 * of declaration; one can extract their location information,
1673 * spelling, find their definitions, etc. However, the specific kind
1674 * of the declaration is not reported.
1675 */
1676 CXCursor_UnexposedDecl = 1,
1677 /** \brief A C or C++ struct. */
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00001678 CXCursor_StructDecl = 2,
Douglas Gregor6007cf22010-01-22 22:29:16 +00001679 /** \brief A C or C++ union. */
1680 CXCursor_UnionDecl = 3,
1681 /** \brief A C++ class. */
1682 CXCursor_ClassDecl = 4,
1683 /** \brief An enumeration. */
1684 CXCursor_EnumDecl = 5,
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00001685 /**
Douglas Gregor6007cf22010-01-22 22:29:16 +00001686 * \brief A field (in C) or non-static data member (in C++) in a
1687 * struct, union, or C++ class.
1688 */
1689 CXCursor_FieldDecl = 6,
1690 /** \brief An enumerator constant. */
1691 CXCursor_EnumConstantDecl = 7,
1692 /** \brief A function. */
1693 CXCursor_FunctionDecl = 8,
1694 /** \brief A variable. */
1695 CXCursor_VarDecl = 9,
1696 /** \brief A function or method parameter. */
1697 CXCursor_ParmDecl = 10,
James Dennett1355bd12012-06-11 06:19:40 +00001698 /** \brief An Objective-C \@interface. */
Douglas Gregor6007cf22010-01-22 22:29:16 +00001699 CXCursor_ObjCInterfaceDecl = 11,
James Dennett1355bd12012-06-11 06:19:40 +00001700 /** \brief An Objective-C \@interface for a category. */
Douglas Gregor6007cf22010-01-22 22:29:16 +00001701 CXCursor_ObjCCategoryDecl = 12,
James Dennett1355bd12012-06-11 06:19:40 +00001702 /** \brief An Objective-C \@protocol declaration. */
Douglas Gregor6007cf22010-01-22 22:29:16 +00001703 CXCursor_ObjCProtocolDecl = 13,
James Dennett1355bd12012-06-11 06:19:40 +00001704 /** \brief An Objective-C \@property declaration. */
Douglas Gregor6007cf22010-01-22 22:29:16 +00001705 CXCursor_ObjCPropertyDecl = 14,
1706 /** \brief An Objective-C instance variable. */
1707 CXCursor_ObjCIvarDecl = 15,
1708 /** \brief An Objective-C instance method. */
1709 CXCursor_ObjCInstanceMethodDecl = 16,
1710 /** \brief An Objective-C class method. */
1711 CXCursor_ObjCClassMethodDecl = 17,
James Dennett1355bd12012-06-11 06:19:40 +00001712 /** \brief An Objective-C \@implementation. */
Douglas Gregor6007cf22010-01-22 22:29:16 +00001713 CXCursor_ObjCImplementationDecl = 18,
James Dennett1355bd12012-06-11 06:19:40 +00001714 /** \brief An Objective-C \@implementation for a category. */
Douglas Gregor6007cf22010-01-22 22:29:16 +00001715 CXCursor_ObjCCategoryImplDecl = 19,
Saleem Abdulrasool993b2862015-08-12 03:21:44 +00001716 /** \brief A typedef. */
Douglas Gregor6007cf22010-01-22 22:29:16 +00001717 CXCursor_TypedefDecl = 20,
Ted Kremenek225b8e32010-04-13 23:39:06 +00001718 /** \brief A C++ class method. */
1719 CXCursor_CXXMethod = 21,
Ted Kremenekbd67fb22010-05-06 23:38:21 +00001720 /** \brief A C++ namespace. */
1721 CXCursor_Namespace = 22,
Ted Kremenekb80cba52010-05-07 01:04:29 +00001722 /** \brief A linkage specification, e.g. 'extern "C"'. */
1723 CXCursor_LinkageSpec = 23,
Douglas Gregor12bca222010-08-31 14:41:23 +00001724 /** \brief A C++ constructor. */
1725 CXCursor_Constructor = 24,
1726 /** \brief A C++ destructor. */
1727 CXCursor_Destructor = 25,
1728 /** \brief A C++ conversion function. */
1729 CXCursor_ConversionFunction = 26,
Douglas Gregor713602b2010-08-31 17:01:39 +00001730 /** \brief A C++ template type parameter. */
1731 CXCursor_TemplateTypeParameter = 27,
1732 /** \brief A C++ non-type template parameter. */
1733 CXCursor_NonTypeTemplateParameter = 28,
1734 /** \brief A C++ template template parameter. */
1735 CXCursor_TemplateTemplateParameter = 29,
1736 /** \brief A C++ function template. */
1737 CXCursor_FunctionTemplate = 30,
Douglas Gregor1fbaeb12010-08-31 19:02:00 +00001738 /** \brief A C++ class template. */
1739 CXCursor_ClassTemplate = 31,
Douglas Gregorf96abb22010-08-31 19:31:58 +00001740 /** \brief A C++ class template partial specialization. */
1741 CXCursor_ClassTemplatePartialSpecialization = 32,
Douglas Gregora89314e2010-08-31 23:48:11 +00001742 /** \brief A C++ namespace alias declaration. */
1743 CXCursor_NamespaceAlias = 33,
Douglas Gregor01a430132010-09-01 03:07:18 +00001744 /** \brief A C++ using directive. */
1745 CXCursor_UsingDirective = 34,
Richard Smithdda56e42011-04-15 14:24:37 +00001746 /** \brief A C++ using declaration. */
Douglas Gregora9aa29c2010-09-01 19:52:22 +00001747 CXCursor_UsingDeclaration = 35,
Richard Smithdda56e42011-04-15 14:24:37 +00001748 /** \brief A C++ alias declaration */
1749 CXCursor_TypeAliasDecl = 36,
James Dennett574cb4c2012-06-15 05:41:51 +00001750 /** \brief An Objective-C \@synthesize definition. */
Douglas Gregor4cd65962011-06-03 23:08:58 +00001751 CXCursor_ObjCSynthesizeDecl = 37,
James Dennett574cb4c2012-06-15 05:41:51 +00001752 /** \brief An Objective-C \@dynamic definition. */
Douglas Gregor4cd65962011-06-03 23:08:58 +00001753 CXCursor_ObjCDynamicDecl = 38,
Argyrios Kyrtzidis12afd702011-09-30 17:58:23 +00001754 /** \brief An access specifier. */
1755 CXCursor_CXXAccessSpecifier = 39,
Douglas Gregor4c362d52011-10-05 19:00:14 +00001756
Ted Kremenek08de5c12010-05-19 21:51:10 +00001757 CXCursor_FirstDecl = CXCursor_UnexposedDecl,
Argyrios Kyrtzidis12afd702011-09-30 17:58:23 +00001758 CXCursor_LastDecl = CXCursor_CXXAccessSpecifier,
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00001759
Douglas Gregor6007cf22010-01-22 22:29:16 +00001760 /* References */
1761 CXCursor_FirstRef = 40, /* Decl references */
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00001762 CXCursor_ObjCSuperClassRef = 40,
Douglas Gregor6007cf22010-01-22 22:29:16 +00001763 CXCursor_ObjCProtocolRef = 41,
1764 CXCursor_ObjCClassRef = 42,
1765 /**
1766 * \brief A reference to a type declaration.
1767 *
1768 * A type reference occurs anywhere where a type is named but not
1769 * declared. For example, given:
1770 *
1771 * \code
1772 * typedef unsigned size_type;
1773 * size_type size;
1774 * \endcode
1775 *
1776 * The typedef is a declaration of size_type (CXCursor_TypedefDecl),
1777 * while the type of the variable "size" is referenced. The cursor
1778 * referenced by the type of size is the typedef for size_type.
1779 */
1780 CXCursor_TypeRef = 43,
Ted Kremenekae9e2212010-08-27 21:34:58 +00001781 CXCursor_CXXBaseSpecifier = 44,
Douglas Gregora23e8f72010-08-31 20:37:03 +00001782 /**
Douglas Gregorf3af3112010-09-09 21:42:20 +00001783 * \brief A reference to a class template, function template, template
1784 * template parameter, or class template partial specialization.
Douglas Gregora23e8f72010-08-31 20:37:03 +00001785 */
1786 CXCursor_TemplateRef = 45,
Douglas Gregora89314e2010-08-31 23:48:11 +00001787 /**
1788 * \brief A reference to a namespace or namespace alias.
1789 */
1790 CXCursor_NamespaceRef = 46,
Douglas Gregorf3af3112010-09-09 21:42:20 +00001791 /**
Douglas Gregora93ab662010-09-10 00:22:18 +00001792 * \brief A reference to a member of a struct, union, or class that occurs in
1793 * some non-expression context, e.g., a designated initializer.
Douglas Gregorf3af3112010-09-09 21:42:20 +00001794 */
1795 CXCursor_MemberRef = 47,
Douglas Gregora93ab662010-09-10 00:22:18 +00001796 /**
1797 * \brief A reference to a labeled statement.
1798 *
1799 * This cursor kind is used to describe the jump to "start_over" in the
1800 * goto statement in the following example:
1801 *
1802 * \code
1803 * start_over:
1804 * ++counter;
1805 *
1806 * goto start_over;
1807 * \endcode
1808 *
1809 * A label reference cursor refers to a label statement.
1810 */
1811 CXCursor_LabelRef = 48,
1812
Douglas Gregor16a2bdd2010-09-13 22:52:57 +00001813 /**
1814 * \brief A reference to a set of overloaded functions or function templates
1815 * that has not yet been resolved to a specific function or function template.
1816 *
1817 * An overloaded declaration reference cursor occurs in C++ templates where
1818 * a dependent name refers to a function. For example:
1819 *
1820 * \code
1821 * template<typename T> void swap(T&, T&);
1822 *
1823 * struct X { ... };
1824 * void swap(X&, X&);
1825 *
1826 * template<typename T>
1827 * void reverse(T* first, T* last) {
1828 * while (first < last - 1) {
1829 * swap(*first, *--last);
1830 * ++first;
1831 * }
1832 * }
1833 *
1834 * struct Y { };
1835 * void swap(Y&, Y&);
1836 * \endcode
1837 *
1838 * Here, the identifier "swap" is associated with an overloaded declaration
1839 * reference. In the template definition, "swap" refers to either of the two
1840 * "swap" functions declared above, so both results will be available. At
1841 * instantiation time, "swap" may also refer to other functions found via
1842 * argument-dependent lookup (e.g., the "swap" function at the end of the
1843 * example).
1844 *
1845 * The functions \c clang_getNumOverloadedDecls() and
1846 * \c clang_getOverloadedDecl() can be used to retrieve the definitions
1847 * referenced by this cursor.
1848 */
1849 CXCursor_OverloadedDeclRef = 49,
1850
Douglas Gregor30093832012-02-15 00:54:55 +00001851 /**
1852 * \brief A reference to a variable that occurs in some non-expression
1853 * context, e.g., a C++ lambda capture list.
1854 */
1855 CXCursor_VariableRef = 50,
1856
1857 CXCursor_LastRef = CXCursor_VariableRef,
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00001858
Douglas Gregor6007cf22010-01-22 22:29:16 +00001859 /* Error conditions */
1860 CXCursor_FirstInvalid = 70,
1861 CXCursor_InvalidFile = 70,
1862 CXCursor_NoDeclFound = 71,
1863 CXCursor_NotImplemented = 72,
Ted Kremeneke184ac52010-03-19 20:39:03 +00001864 CXCursor_InvalidCode = 73,
1865 CXCursor_LastInvalid = CXCursor_InvalidCode,
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00001866
Douglas Gregor6007cf22010-01-22 22:29:16 +00001867 /* Expressions */
1868 CXCursor_FirstExpr = 100,
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00001869
Douglas Gregor6007cf22010-01-22 22:29:16 +00001870 /**
1871 * \brief An expression whose specific kind is not exposed via this
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00001872 * interface.
Douglas Gregor6007cf22010-01-22 22:29:16 +00001873 *
1874 * Unexposed expressions have the same operations as any other kind
1875 * of expression; one can extract their location information,
1876 * spelling, children, etc. However, the specific kind of the
1877 * expression is not reported.
1878 */
1879 CXCursor_UnexposedExpr = 100,
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00001880
Douglas Gregor6007cf22010-01-22 22:29:16 +00001881 /**
1882 * \brief An expression that refers to some value declaration, such
Nico Weber7deebef2014-04-24 03:17:47 +00001883 * as a function, variable, or enumerator.
Douglas Gregor6007cf22010-01-22 22:29:16 +00001884 */
1885 CXCursor_DeclRefExpr = 101,
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00001886
Douglas Gregor6007cf22010-01-22 22:29:16 +00001887 /**
1888 * \brief An expression that refers to a member of a struct, union,
1889 * class, Objective-C class, etc.
1890 */
1891 CXCursor_MemberRefExpr = 102,
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00001892
Douglas Gregor6007cf22010-01-22 22:29:16 +00001893 /** \brief An expression that calls a function. */
1894 CXCursor_CallExpr = 103,
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00001895
Douglas Gregor6007cf22010-01-22 22:29:16 +00001896 /** \brief An expression that sends a message to an Objective-C
1897 object or class. */
1898 CXCursor_ObjCMessageExpr = 104,
Ted Kremenek33b9a422010-04-11 21:47:37 +00001899
1900 /** \brief An expression that represents a block literal. */
1901 CXCursor_BlockExpr = 105,
1902
Douglas Gregor4c362d52011-10-05 19:00:14 +00001903 /** \brief An integer literal.
1904 */
1905 CXCursor_IntegerLiteral = 106,
1906
1907 /** \brief A floating point number literal.
1908 */
1909 CXCursor_FloatingLiteral = 107,
1910
1911 /** \brief An imaginary number literal.
1912 */
1913 CXCursor_ImaginaryLiteral = 108,
1914
1915 /** \brief A string literal.
1916 */
1917 CXCursor_StringLiteral = 109,
1918
1919 /** \brief A character literal.
1920 */
1921 CXCursor_CharacterLiteral = 110,
1922
1923 /** \brief A parenthesized expression, e.g. "(1)".
1924 *
1925 * This AST node is only formed if full location information is requested.
1926 */
1927 CXCursor_ParenExpr = 111,
1928
1929 /** \brief This represents the unary-expression's (except sizeof and
1930 * alignof).
1931 */
1932 CXCursor_UnaryOperator = 112,
1933
1934 /** \brief [C99 6.5.2.1] Array Subscripting.
1935 */
1936 CXCursor_ArraySubscriptExpr = 113,
1937
1938 /** \brief A builtin binary operation expression such as "x + y" or
1939 * "x <= y".
1940 */
1941 CXCursor_BinaryOperator = 114,
1942
1943 /** \brief Compound assignment such as "+=".
1944 */
1945 CXCursor_CompoundAssignOperator = 115,
1946
1947 /** \brief The ?: ternary operator.
1948 */
1949 CXCursor_ConditionalOperator = 116,
1950
1951 /** \brief An explicit cast in C (C99 6.5.4) or a C-style cast in C++
1952 * (C++ [expr.cast]), which uses the syntax (Type)expr.
1953 *
1954 * For example: (int)f.
1955 */
1956 CXCursor_CStyleCastExpr = 117,
1957
1958 /** \brief [C99 6.5.2.5]
1959 */
1960 CXCursor_CompoundLiteralExpr = 118,
1961
1962 /** \brief Describes an C or C++ initializer list.
1963 */
1964 CXCursor_InitListExpr = 119,
1965
1966 /** \brief The GNU address of label extension, representing &&label.
1967 */
1968 CXCursor_AddrLabelExpr = 120,
1969
1970 /** \brief This is the GNU Statement Expression extension: ({int X=4; X;})
1971 */
1972 CXCursor_StmtExpr = 121,
1973
Benjamin Kramere56f3932011-12-23 17:00:35 +00001974 /** \brief Represents a C11 generic selection.
Douglas Gregor4c362d52011-10-05 19:00:14 +00001975 */
1976 CXCursor_GenericSelectionExpr = 122,
1977
1978 /** \brief Implements the GNU __null extension, which is a name for a null
1979 * pointer constant that has integral type (e.g., int or long) and is the same
1980 * size and alignment as a pointer.
1981 *
1982 * The __null extension is typically only used by system headers, which define
1983 * NULL as __null in C++ rather than using 0 (which is an integer that may not
1984 * match the size of a pointer).
1985 */
1986 CXCursor_GNUNullExpr = 123,
1987
1988 /** \brief C++'s static_cast<> expression.
1989 */
1990 CXCursor_CXXStaticCastExpr = 124,
1991
1992 /** \brief C++'s dynamic_cast<> expression.
1993 */
1994 CXCursor_CXXDynamicCastExpr = 125,
1995
1996 /** \brief C++'s reinterpret_cast<> expression.
1997 */
1998 CXCursor_CXXReinterpretCastExpr = 126,
1999
2000 /** \brief C++'s const_cast<> expression.
2001 */
2002 CXCursor_CXXConstCastExpr = 127,
2003
2004 /** \brief Represents an explicit C++ type conversion that uses "functional"
2005 * notion (C++ [expr.type.conv]).
2006 *
2007 * Example:
2008 * \code
2009 * x = int(0.5);
2010 * \endcode
2011 */
2012 CXCursor_CXXFunctionalCastExpr = 128,
2013
2014 /** \brief A C++ typeid expression (C++ [expr.typeid]).
2015 */
2016 CXCursor_CXXTypeidExpr = 129,
2017
2018 /** \brief [C++ 2.13.5] C++ Boolean Literal.
2019 */
2020 CXCursor_CXXBoolLiteralExpr = 130,
2021
2022 /** \brief [C++0x 2.14.7] C++ Pointer Literal.
2023 */
2024 CXCursor_CXXNullPtrLiteralExpr = 131,
2025
2026 /** \brief Represents the "this" expression in C++
2027 */
2028 CXCursor_CXXThisExpr = 132,
2029
2030 /** \brief [C++ 15] C++ Throw Expression.
2031 *
2032 * This handles 'throw' and 'throw' assignment-expression. When
2033 * assignment-expression isn't present, Op will be null.
2034 */
2035 CXCursor_CXXThrowExpr = 133,
2036
2037 /** \brief A new expression for memory allocation and constructor calls, e.g:
2038 * "new CXXNewExpr(foo)".
2039 */
2040 CXCursor_CXXNewExpr = 134,
2041
2042 /** \brief A delete expression for memory deallocation and destructor calls,
2043 * e.g. "delete[] pArray".
2044 */
2045 CXCursor_CXXDeleteExpr = 135,
2046
Olivier Goffart692d5332016-06-09 16:16:06 +00002047 /** \brief A unary expression. (noexcept, sizeof, or other traits)
Douglas Gregor4c362d52011-10-05 19:00:14 +00002048 */
2049 CXCursor_UnaryExpr = 136,
2050
Douglas Gregor910c37c2011-11-11 22:35:18 +00002051 /** \brief An Objective-C string literal i.e. @"foo".
Douglas Gregor4c362d52011-10-05 19:00:14 +00002052 */
2053 CXCursor_ObjCStringLiteral = 137,
2054
James Dennett574cb4c2012-06-15 05:41:51 +00002055 /** \brief An Objective-C \@encode expression.
Douglas Gregor4c362d52011-10-05 19:00:14 +00002056 */
2057 CXCursor_ObjCEncodeExpr = 138,
2058
James Dennett574cb4c2012-06-15 05:41:51 +00002059 /** \brief An Objective-C \@selector expression.
Douglas Gregor4c362d52011-10-05 19:00:14 +00002060 */
2061 CXCursor_ObjCSelectorExpr = 139,
2062
James Dennett1355bd12012-06-11 06:19:40 +00002063 /** \brief An Objective-C \@protocol expression.
Douglas Gregor4c362d52011-10-05 19:00:14 +00002064 */
2065 CXCursor_ObjCProtocolExpr = 140,
2066
2067 /** \brief An Objective-C "bridged" cast expression, which casts between
2068 * Objective-C pointers and C pointers, transferring ownership in the process.
2069 *
2070 * \code
2071 * NSString *str = (__bridge_transfer NSString *)CFCreateString();
2072 * \endcode
2073 */
2074 CXCursor_ObjCBridgedCastExpr = 141,
2075
2076 /** \brief Represents a C++0x pack expansion that produces a sequence of
2077 * expressions.
2078 *
2079 * A pack expansion expression contains a pattern (which itself is an
2080 * expression) followed by an ellipsis. For example:
2081 *
2082 * \code
2083 * template<typename F, typename ...Types>
2084 * void forward(F f, Types &&...args) {
2085 * f(static_cast<Types&&>(args)...);
2086 * }
2087 * \endcode
2088 */
2089 CXCursor_PackExpansionExpr = 142,
2090
2091 /** \brief Represents an expression that computes the length of a parameter
2092 * pack.
2093 *
2094 * \code
2095 * template<typename ...Types>
2096 * struct count {
2097 * static const unsigned value = sizeof...(Types);
2098 * };
2099 * \endcode
2100 */
2101 CXCursor_SizeOfPackExpr = 143,
2102
Douglas Gregor30093832012-02-15 00:54:55 +00002103 /* \brief Represents a C++ lambda expression that produces a local function
2104 * object.
2105 *
2106 * \code
2107 * void abssort(float *x, unsigned N) {
2108 * std::sort(x, x + N,
2109 * [](float a, float b) {
2110 * return std::abs(a) < std::abs(b);
2111 * });
2112 * }
2113 * \endcode
2114 */
2115 CXCursor_LambdaExpr = 144,
2116
Ted Kremenek77006f62012-03-06 20:06:06 +00002117 /** \brief Objective-c Boolean Literal.
2118 */
2119 CXCursor_ObjCBoolLiteralExpr = 145,
2120
Nico Weber7deebef2014-04-24 03:17:47 +00002121 /** \brief Represents the "self" expression in an Objective-C method.
Argyrios Kyrtzidisc2233be2013-04-23 17:57:17 +00002122 */
2123 CXCursor_ObjCSelfExpr = 146,
2124
Alexey Bataev1a3320e2015-08-25 14:24:04 +00002125 /** \brief OpenMP 4.0 [2.4, Array Section].
2126 */
2127 CXCursor_OMPArraySectionExpr = 147,
2128
Erik Pilkington29099de2016-07-16 00:35:23 +00002129 /** \brief Represents an @available(...) check.
2130 */
2131 CXCursor_ObjCAvailabilityCheckExpr = 148,
2132
2133 CXCursor_LastExpr = CXCursor_ObjCAvailabilityCheckExpr,
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00002134
Douglas Gregor6007cf22010-01-22 22:29:16 +00002135 /* Statements */
2136 CXCursor_FirstStmt = 200,
2137 /**
2138 * \brief A statement whose specific kind is not exposed via this
2139 * interface.
2140 *
2141 * Unexposed statements have the same operations as any other kind of
2142 * statement; one can extract their location information, spelling,
2143 * children, etc. However, the specific kind of the statement is not
2144 * reported.
2145 */
2146 CXCursor_UnexposedStmt = 200,
Douglas Gregora93ab662010-09-10 00:22:18 +00002147
2148 /** \brief A labelled statement in a function.
2149 *
2150 * This cursor kind is used to describe the "start_over:" label statement in
2151 * the following example:
2152 *
2153 * \code
2154 * start_over:
2155 * ++counter;
2156 * \endcode
2157 *
2158 */
2159 CXCursor_LabelStmt = 201,
Douglas Gregor4c362d52011-10-05 19:00:14 +00002160
2161 /** \brief A group of statements like { stmt stmt }.
2162 *
2163 * This cursor kind is used to describe compound statements, e.g. function
2164 * bodies.
2165 */
2166 CXCursor_CompoundStmt = 202,
2167
Benjamin Kramer2501f142013-10-20 11:47:15 +00002168 /** \brief A case statement.
Douglas Gregor4c362d52011-10-05 19:00:14 +00002169 */
2170 CXCursor_CaseStmt = 203,
2171
2172 /** \brief A default statement.
2173 */
2174 CXCursor_DefaultStmt = 204,
2175
2176 /** \brief An if statement
2177 */
2178 CXCursor_IfStmt = 205,
2179
2180 /** \brief A switch statement.
2181 */
2182 CXCursor_SwitchStmt = 206,
2183
2184 /** \brief A while statement.
2185 */
2186 CXCursor_WhileStmt = 207,
2187
2188 /** \brief A do statement.
2189 */
2190 CXCursor_DoStmt = 208,
2191
2192 /** \brief A for statement.
2193 */
2194 CXCursor_ForStmt = 209,
2195
2196 /** \brief A goto statement.
2197 */
2198 CXCursor_GotoStmt = 210,
2199
2200 /** \brief An indirect goto statement.
2201 */
2202 CXCursor_IndirectGotoStmt = 211,
2203
2204 /** \brief A continue statement.
2205 */
2206 CXCursor_ContinueStmt = 212,
2207
2208 /** \brief A break statement.
2209 */
2210 CXCursor_BreakStmt = 213,
2211
2212 /** \brief A return statement.
2213 */
2214 CXCursor_ReturnStmt = 214,
2215
Chad Rosierde70e0e2012-08-25 00:11:56 +00002216 /** \brief A GCC inline assembly statement extension.
Douglas Gregor4c362d52011-10-05 19:00:14 +00002217 */
Chad Rosierde70e0e2012-08-25 00:11:56 +00002218 CXCursor_GCCAsmStmt = 215,
Argyrios Kyrtzidis5eae0732012-09-24 19:27:20 +00002219 CXCursor_AsmStmt = CXCursor_GCCAsmStmt,
Douglas Gregor4c362d52011-10-05 19:00:14 +00002220
James Dennett574cb4c2012-06-15 05:41:51 +00002221 /** \brief Objective-C's overall \@try-\@catch-\@finally statement.
Douglas Gregor4c362d52011-10-05 19:00:14 +00002222 */
2223 CXCursor_ObjCAtTryStmt = 216,
2224
James Dennett574cb4c2012-06-15 05:41:51 +00002225 /** \brief Objective-C's \@catch statement.
Douglas Gregor4c362d52011-10-05 19:00:14 +00002226 */
2227 CXCursor_ObjCAtCatchStmt = 217,
2228
James Dennett574cb4c2012-06-15 05:41:51 +00002229 /** \brief Objective-C's \@finally statement.
Douglas Gregor4c362d52011-10-05 19:00:14 +00002230 */
2231 CXCursor_ObjCAtFinallyStmt = 218,
2232
James Dennett574cb4c2012-06-15 05:41:51 +00002233 /** \brief Objective-C's \@throw statement.
Douglas Gregor4c362d52011-10-05 19:00:14 +00002234 */
2235 CXCursor_ObjCAtThrowStmt = 219,
2236
James Dennett574cb4c2012-06-15 05:41:51 +00002237 /** \brief Objective-C's \@synchronized statement.
Douglas Gregor4c362d52011-10-05 19:00:14 +00002238 */
2239 CXCursor_ObjCAtSynchronizedStmt = 220,
2240
2241 /** \brief Objective-C's autorelease pool statement.
2242 */
2243 CXCursor_ObjCAutoreleasePoolStmt = 221,
2244
2245 /** \brief Objective-C's collection statement.
2246 */
2247 CXCursor_ObjCForCollectionStmt = 222,
2248
2249 /** \brief C++'s catch statement.
2250 */
2251 CXCursor_CXXCatchStmt = 223,
2252
2253 /** \brief C++'s try statement.
2254 */
2255 CXCursor_CXXTryStmt = 224,
2256
2257 /** \brief C++'s for (* : *) statement.
2258 */
2259 CXCursor_CXXForRangeStmt = 225,
2260
2261 /** \brief Windows Structured Exception Handling's try statement.
2262 */
2263 CXCursor_SEHTryStmt = 226,
2264
2265 /** \brief Windows Structured Exception Handling's except statement.
2266 */
2267 CXCursor_SEHExceptStmt = 227,
2268
2269 /** \brief Windows Structured Exception Handling's finally statement.
2270 */
2271 CXCursor_SEHFinallyStmt = 228,
2272
Chad Rosier32503022012-06-11 20:47:18 +00002273 /** \brief A MS inline assembly statement extension.
2274 */
2275 CXCursor_MSAsmStmt = 229,
2276
Chad Rosierdb1cc7f2014-12-05 15:50:44 +00002277 /** \brief The null statement ";": C99 6.8.3p3.
Douglas Gregor4c362d52011-10-05 19:00:14 +00002278 *
2279 * This cursor kind is used to describe the null statement.
2280 */
2281 CXCursor_NullStmt = 230,
2282
2283 /** \brief Adaptor class for mixing declarations with statements and
2284 * expressions.
2285 */
2286 CXCursor_DeclStmt = 231,
2287
Alexey Bataev5ec3eb12013-07-19 03:13:43 +00002288 /** \brief OpenMP parallel directive.
2289 */
2290 CXCursor_OMPParallelDirective = 232,
2291
Chad Rosierdb1cc7f2014-12-05 15:50:44 +00002292 /** \brief OpenMP SIMD directive.
Alexey Bataev1b59ab52014-02-27 08:29:12 +00002293 */
2294 CXCursor_OMPSimdDirective = 233,
2295
Alexey Bataevf29276e2014-06-18 04:14:57 +00002296 /** \brief OpenMP for directive.
2297 */
2298 CXCursor_OMPForDirective = 234,
2299
Alexey Bataevd3f8dd22014-06-25 11:44:49 +00002300 /** \brief OpenMP sections directive.
2301 */
2302 CXCursor_OMPSectionsDirective = 235,
2303
Alexey Bataev1e0498a2014-06-26 08:21:58 +00002304 /** \brief OpenMP section directive.
2305 */
2306 CXCursor_OMPSectionDirective = 236,
2307
Alexey Bataevd1e40fb2014-06-26 12:05:45 +00002308 /** \brief OpenMP single directive.
2309 */
2310 CXCursor_OMPSingleDirective = 237,
2311
Alexey Bataev4acb8592014-07-07 13:01:15 +00002312 /** \brief OpenMP parallel for directive.
2313 */
2314 CXCursor_OMPParallelForDirective = 238,
2315
Alexey Bataev84d0b3e2014-07-08 08:12:03 +00002316 /** \brief OpenMP parallel sections directive.
2317 */
2318 CXCursor_OMPParallelSectionsDirective = 239,
2319
Alexey Bataev9c2e8ee2014-07-11 11:25:16 +00002320 /** \brief OpenMP task directive.
2321 */
2322 CXCursor_OMPTaskDirective = 240,
2323
Alexander Musman80c22892014-07-17 08:54:58 +00002324 /** \brief OpenMP master directive.
2325 */
2326 CXCursor_OMPMasterDirective = 241,
2327
Alexander Musmand9ed09f2014-07-21 09:42:05 +00002328 /** \brief OpenMP critical directive.
2329 */
2330 CXCursor_OMPCriticalDirective = 242,
2331
Alexey Bataev68446b72014-07-18 07:47:19 +00002332 /** \brief OpenMP taskyield directive.
2333 */
Alexander Musmand9ed09f2014-07-21 09:42:05 +00002334 CXCursor_OMPTaskyieldDirective = 243,
Alexey Bataev68446b72014-07-18 07:47:19 +00002335
Alexey Bataev4d1dfea2014-07-18 09:11:51 +00002336 /** \brief OpenMP barrier directive.
2337 */
Alexander Musmand9ed09f2014-07-21 09:42:05 +00002338 CXCursor_OMPBarrierDirective = 244,
Alexey Bataev4d1dfea2014-07-18 09:11:51 +00002339
Alexey Bataev2df347a2014-07-18 10:17:07 +00002340 /** \brief OpenMP taskwait directive.
2341 */
Alexander Musmand9ed09f2014-07-21 09:42:05 +00002342 CXCursor_OMPTaskwaitDirective = 245,
Alexey Bataev2df347a2014-07-18 10:17:07 +00002343
Alexey Bataev6125da92014-07-21 11:26:11 +00002344 /** \brief OpenMP flush directive.
2345 */
2346 CXCursor_OMPFlushDirective = 246,
Alexey Bataev0162e452014-07-22 10:10:35 +00002347
Reid Klecknerba764482014-07-24 18:22:15 +00002348 /** \brief Windows Structured Exception Handling's leave statement.
2349 */
2350 CXCursor_SEHLeaveStmt = 247,
2351
Alexey Bataev9fb6e642014-07-22 06:45:04 +00002352 /** \brief OpenMP ordered directive.
2353 */
Reid Klecknerba764482014-07-24 18:22:15 +00002354 CXCursor_OMPOrderedDirective = 248,
Alexey Bataev6125da92014-07-21 11:26:11 +00002355
Alexey Bataev0162e452014-07-22 10:10:35 +00002356 /** \brief OpenMP atomic directive.
2357 */
Reid Klecknerba764482014-07-24 18:22:15 +00002358 CXCursor_OMPAtomicDirective = 249,
Alexey Bataev0162e452014-07-22 10:10:35 +00002359
Chad Rosierdb1cc7f2014-12-05 15:50:44 +00002360 /** \brief OpenMP for SIMD directive.
Alexander Musmanf82886e2014-09-18 05:12:34 +00002361 */
2362 CXCursor_OMPForSimdDirective = 250,
2363
Chad Rosierdb1cc7f2014-12-05 15:50:44 +00002364 /** \brief OpenMP parallel for SIMD directive.
Alexander Musmane4e893b2014-09-23 09:33:00 +00002365 */
2366 CXCursor_OMPParallelForSimdDirective = 251,
2367
Alexey Bataev0bd520b2014-09-19 08:19:49 +00002368 /** \brief OpenMP target directive.
2369 */
Alexander Musmane4e893b2014-09-23 09:33:00 +00002370 CXCursor_OMPTargetDirective = 252,
Alexey Bataev0bd520b2014-09-19 08:19:49 +00002371
Alexey Bataev13314bf2014-10-09 04:18:56 +00002372 /** \brief OpenMP teams directive.
2373 */
2374 CXCursor_OMPTeamsDirective = 253,
2375
Alexey Bataev6d4ed052015-07-01 06:57:41 +00002376 /** \brief OpenMP taskgroup directive.
Alexey Bataevc30dd2d2015-06-18 12:14:09 +00002377 */
Michael Wong65f367f2015-07-21 13:44:28 +00002378 CXCursor_OMPTaskgroupDirective = 254,
Alexey Bataevc30dd2d2015-06-18 12:14:09 +00002379
Alexey Bataev6d4ed052015-07-01 06:57:41 +00002380 /** \brief OpenMP cancellation point directive.
2381 */
Michael Wong65f367f2015-07-21 13:44:28 +00002382 CXCursor_OMPCancellationPointDirective = 255,
Alexey Bataevc30dd2d2015-06-18 12:14:09 +00002383
Alexey Bataev80909872015-07-02 11:25:17 +00002384 /** \brief OpenMP cancel directive.
2385 */
Michael Wong65f367f2015-07-21 13:44:28 +00002386 CXCursor_OMPCancelDirective = 256,
Alexey Bataev80909872015-07-02 11:25:17 +00002387
Michael Wong65f367f2015-07-21 13:44:28 +00002388 /** \brief OpenMP target data directive.
2389 */
2390 CXCursor_OMPTargetDataDirective = 257,
2391
Alexey Bataev49f6e782015-12-01 04:18:41 +00002392 /** \brief OpenMP taskloop directive.
2393 */
2394 CXCursor_OMPTaskLoopDirective = 258,
2395
Alexey Bataev0a6ed842015-12-03 09:40:15 +00002396 /** \brief OpenMP taskloop simd directive.
2397 */
2398 CXCursor_OMPTaskLoopSimdDirective = 259,
2399
Samuel Antao686c70c2016-05-26 17:30:50 +00002400 /** \brief OpenMP distribute directive.
Carlo Bertolli6200a3d2015-12-14 14:51:25 +00002401 */
2402 CXCursor_OMPDistributeDirective = 260,
2403
Samuel Antaodf67fc42016-01-19 19:15:56 +00002404 /** \brief OpenMP target enter data directive.
2405 */
2406 CXCursor_OMPTargetEnterDataDirective = 261,
2407
Samuel Antao72590762016-01-19 20:04:50 +00002408 /** \brief OpenMP target exit data directive.
2409 */
2410 CXCursor_OMPTargetExitDataDirective = 262,
2411
Arpith Chacko Jacobe955b3d2016-01-26 18:48:41 +00002412 /** \brief OpenMP target parallel directive.
2413 */
2414 CXCursor_OMPTargetParallelDirective = 263,
2415
Arpith Chacko Jacob05bebb52016-02-03 15:46:42 +00002416 /** \brief OpenMP target parallel for directive.
2417 */
2418 CXCursor_OMPTargetParallelForDirective = 264,
2419
Samuel Antao686c70c2016-05-26 17:30:50 +00002420 /** \brief OpenMP target update directive.
2421 */
2422 CXCursor_OMPTargetUpdateDirective = 265,
2423
Carlo Bertolli9925f152016-06-27 14:55:37 +00002424 /** \brief OpenMP distribute parallel for directive.
2425 */
2426 CXCursor_OMPDistributeParallelForDirective = 266,
2427
Kelvin Li4a39add2016-07-05 05:00:15 +00002428 /** \brief OpenMP distribute parallel for simd directive.
2429 */
2430 CXCursor_OMPDistributeParallelForSimdDirective = 267,
2431
Kelvin Li787f3fc2016-07-06 04:45:38 +00002432 /** \brief OpenMP distribute simd directive.
2433 */
2434 CXCursor_OMPDistributeSimdDirective = 268,
2435
Kelvin Lia579b912016-07-14 02:54:56 +00002436 /** \brief OpenMP target parallel for simd directive.
2437 */
2438 CXCursor_OMPTargetParallelForSimdDirective = 269,
2439
Kelvin Li986330c2016-07-20 22:57:10 +00002440 /** \brief OpenMP target simd directive.
2441 */
2442 CXCursor_OMPTargetSimdDirective = 270,
2443
Kelvin Li02532872016-08-05 14:37:37 +00002444 /** \brief OpenMP teams distribute directive.
2445 */
2446 CXCursor_OMPTeamsDistributeDirective = 271,
2447
Kelvin Li4e325f72016-10-25 12:50:55 +00002448 /** \brief OpenMP teams distribute simd directive.
2449 */
2450 CXCursor_OMPTeamsDistributeSimdDirective = 272,
2451
Kelvin Li579e41c2016-11-30 23:51:03 +00002452 /** \brief OpenMP teams distribute parallel for simd directive.
2453 */
2454 CXCursor_OMPTeamsDistributeParallelForSimdDirective = 273,
2455
Kelvin Li7ade93f2016-12-09 03:24:30 +00002456 /** \brief OpenMP teams distribute parallel for directive.
2457 */
2458 CXCursor_OMPTeamsDistributeParallelForDirective = 274,
2459
Kelvin Libf594a52016-12-17 05:48:59 +00002460 /** \brief OpenMP target teams directive.
2461 */
2462 CXCursor_OMPTargetTeamsDirective = 275,
2463
Kelvin Li83c451e2016-12-25 04:52:54 +00002464 /** \brief OpenMP target teams distribute directive.
2465 */
2466 CXCursor_OMPTargetTeamsDistributeDirective = 276,
2467
Kelvin Li80e8f562016-12-29 22:16:30 +00002468 /** \brief OpenMP target teams distribute parallel for directive.
2469 */
2470 CXCursor_OMPTargetTeamsDistributeParallelForDirective = 277,
2471
Kelvin Li1851df52017-01-03 05:23:48 +00002472 /** \brief OpenMP target teams distribute parallel for simd directive.
2473 */
2474 CXCursor_OMPTargetTeamsDistributeParallelForSimdDirective = 278,
2475
Kelvin Lida681182017-01-10 18:08:18 +00002476 /** \brief OpenMP target teams distribute simd directive.
2477 */
2478 CXCursor_OMPTargetTeamsDistributeSimdDirective = 279,
2479
2480 CXCursor_LastStmt = CXCursor_OMPTargetTeamsDistributeSimdDirective,
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00002481
Douglas Gregor6007cf22010-01-22 22:29:16 +00002482 /**
2483 * \brief Cursor that represents the translation unit itself.
2484 *
2485 * The translation unit cursor exists primarily to act as the root
2486 * cursor for traversing the contents of a translation unit.
2487 */
Ted Kremenekbff31432010-02-18 03:09:07 +00002488 CXCursor_TranslationUnit = 300,
2489
Bill Wendling44426052012-12-20 19:22:21 +00002490 /* Attributes */
Ted Kremenekbff31432010-02-18 03:09:07 +00002491 CXCursor_FirstAttr = 400,
2492 /**
2493 * \brief An attribute whose specific kind is not exposed via this
2494 * interface.
2495 */
2496 CXCursor_UnexposedAttr = 400,
2497
2498 CXCursor_IBActionAttr = 401,
2499 CXCursor_IBOutletAttr = 402,
Ted Kremenek26bde772010-05-19 17:38:06 +00002500 CXCursor_IBOutletCollectionAttr = 403,
Argyrios Kyrtzidis2cb4e3c2011-09-13 17:39:31 +00002501 CXCursor_CXXFinalAttr = 404,
2502 CXCursor_CXXOverrideAttr = 405,
Erik Verbruggenca98f2a2011-10-13 09:41:32 +00002503 CXCursor_AnnotateAttr = 406,
Argyrios Kyrtzidis66f433a2011-12-06 22:05:01 +00002504 CXCursor_AsmLabelAttr = 407,
Argyrios Kyrtzidis16834f12013-09-25 00:14:38 +00002505 CXCursor_PackedAttr = 408,
Joey Gouly81228382014-05-01 15:41:58 +00002506 CXCursor_PureAttr = 409,
2507 CXCursor_ConstAttr = 410,
2508 CXCursor_NoDuplicateAttr = 411,
Eli Bendersky2581e662014-05-28 19:29:58 +00002509 CXCursor_CUDAConstantAttr = 412,
2510 CXCursor_CUDADeviceAttr = 413,
2511 CXCursor_CUDAGlobalAttr = 414,
2512 CXCursor_CUDAHostAttr = 415,
Eli Bendersky9b071472014-08-08 14:59:00 +00002513 CXCursor_CUDASharedAttr = 416,
Saleem Abdulrasool79c69712015-09-05 18:53:43 +00002514 CXCursor_VisibilityAttr = 417,
Saleem Abdulrasool8aa0b802015-12-10 18:45:18 +00002515 CXCursor_DLLExport = 418,
2516 CXCursor_DLLImport = 419,
2517 CXCursor_LastAttr = CXCursor_DLLImport,
Eli Bendersky2581e662014-05-28 19:29:58 +00002518
Douglas Gregor92a524f2010-03-18 00:42:48 +00002519 /* Preprocessing */
2520 CXCursor_PreprocessingDirective = 500,
Douglas Gregor06d6d322010-03-18 18:04:21 +00002521 CXCursor_MacroDefinition = 501,
Chandler Carruth9e4704a2011-07-14 08:41:15 +00002522 CXCursor_MacroExpansion = 502,
2523 CXCursor_MacroInstantiation = CXCursor_MacroExpansion,
Douglas Gregor796d76a2010-10-20 22:00:55 +00002524 CXCursor_InclusionDirective = 503,
Douglas Gregor92a524f2010-03-18 00:42:48 +00002525 CXCursor_FirstPreprocessing = CXCursor_PreprocessingDirective,
Argyrios Kyrtzidis50e5b1d2012-10-05 00:22:24 +00002526 CXCursor_LastPreprocessing = CXCursor_InclusionDirective,
2527
2528 /* Extra Declarations */
2529 /**
2530 * \brief A module import declaration.
2531 */
2532 CXCursor_ModuleImportDecl = 600,
Sergey Kalinichev8f3b1872015-11-15 13:48:32 +00002533 CXCursor_TypeAliasTemplateDecl = 601,
Olivier Goffart81978012016-06-09 16:15:55 +00002534 /**
2535 * \brief A static_assert or _Static_assert node
2536 */
2537 CXCursor_StaticAssert = 602,
Olivier Goffartd211c642016-11-04 06:29:27 +00002538 /**
2539 * \brief a friend declaration.
2540 */
2541 CXCursor_FriendDecl = 603,
Argyrios Kyrtzidis50e5b1d2012-10-05 00:22:24 +00002542 CXCursor_FirstExtraDecl = CXCursor_ModuleImportDecl,
Olivier Goffartd211c642016-11-04 06:29:27 +00002543 CXCursor_LastExtraDecl = CXCursor_FriendDecl,
Francisco Lopes da Silva975a9f62015-01-21 16:24:11 +00002544
2545 /**
2546 * \brief A code completion overload candidate.
2547 */
2548 CXCursor_OverloadCandidate = 700
Douglas Gregor6007cf22010-01-22 22:29:16 +00002549};
2550
2551/**
2552 * \brief A cursor representing some element in the abstract syntax tree for
2553 * a translation unit.
2554 *
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00002555 * The cursor abstraction unifies the different kinds of entities in a
Douglas Gregor6007cf22010-01-22 22:29:16 +00002556 * program--declaration, statements, expressions, references to declarations,
2557 * etc.--under a single "cursor" abstraction with a common set of operations.
2558 * Common operation for a cursor include: getting the physical location in
2559 * a source file where the cursor points, getting the name associated with a
2560 * cursor, and retrieving cursors for any child nodes of a particular cursor.
2561 *
2562 * Cursors can be produced in two specific ways.
2563 * clang_getTranslationUnitCursor() produces a cursor for a translation unit,
2564 * from which one can use clang_visitChildren() to explore the rest of the
2565 * translation unit. clang_getCursor() maps from a physical source location
2566 * to the entity that resides at that location, allowing one to map from the
2567 * source code into the AST.
2568 */
2569typedef struct {
2570 enum CXCursorKind kind;
Argyrios Kyrtzidiscddafd32011-10-06 07:00:54 +00002571 int xdata;
Dmitri Gribenkoba2f7462013-01-11 21:01:49 +00002572 const void *data[3];
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00002573} CXCursor;
Douglas Gregor6007cf22010-01-22 22:29:16 +00002574
2575/**
2576 * \defgroup CINDEX_CURSOR_MANIP Cursor manipulations
2577 *
2578 * @{
2579 */
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00002580
Douglas Gregor6007cf22010-01-22 22:29:16 +00002581/**
2582 * \brief Retrieve the NULL cursor, which represents no entity.
2583 */
2584CINDEX_LINKAGE CXCursor clang_getNullCursor(void);
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00002585
Douglas Gregor6007cf22010-01-22 22:29:16 +00002586/**
2587 * \brief Retrieve the cursor that represents the given translation unit.
2588 *
2589 * The translation unit cursor can be used to start traversing the
2590 * various declarations within the given translation unit.
2591 */
2592CINDEX_LINKAGE CXCursor clang_getTranslationUnitCursor(CXTranslationUnit);
2593
2594/**
2595 * \brief Determine whether two cursors are equivalent.
2596 */
2597CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_equalCursors(CXCursor, CXCursor);
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00002598
Douglas Gregor6007cf22010-01-22 22:29:16 +00002599/**
Dmitri Gribenko8994e0c2012-09-13 13:11:20 +00002600 * \brief Returns non-zero if \p cursor is null.
Argyrios Kyrtzidisd6e9fa52011-09-27 00:30:30 +00002601 */
Dmitri Gribenko8994e0c2012-09-13 13:11:20 +00002602CINDEX_LINKAGE int clang_Cursor_isNull(CXCursor cursor);
Argyrios Kyrtzidisd6e9fa52011-09-27 00:30:30 +00002603
2604/**
Douglas Gregor06a3f302010-11-20 00:09:34 +00002605 * \brief Compute a hash value for the given cursor.
2606 */
2607CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_hashCursor(CXCursor);
2608
2609/**
Douglas Gregor6007cf22010-01-22 22:29:16 +00002610 * \brief Retrieve the kind of the given cursor.
2611 */
2612CINDEX_LINKAGE enum CXCursorKind clang_getCursorKind(CXCursor);
2613
2614/**
2615 * \brief Determine whether the given cursor kind represents a declaration.
2616 */
2617CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_isDeclaration(enum CXCursorKind);
2618
2619/**
2620 * \brief Determine whether the given cursor kind represents a simple
2621 * reference.
2622 *
2623 * Note that other kinds of cursors (such as expressions) can also refer to
2624 * other cursors. Use clang_getCursorReferenced() to determine whether a
2625 * particular cursor refers to another entity.
2626 */
2627CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_isReference(enum CXCursorKind);
2628
2629/**
2630 * \brief Determine whether the given cursor kind represents an expression.
2631 */
2632CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_isExpression(enum CXCursorKind);
2633
2634/**
2635 * \brief Determine whether the given cursor kind represents a statement.
2636 */
2637CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_isStatement(enum CXCursorKind);
2638
2639/**
Douglas Gregora98034a2011-07-06 03:00:34 +00002640 * \brief Determine whether the given cursor kind represents an attribute.
2641 */
2642CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_isAttribute(enum CXCursorKind);
2643
2644/**
Argyrios Kyrtzidis785705b2016-01-16 00:20:02 +00002645 * \brief Determine whether the given cursor has any attributes.
2646 */
2647CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_Cursor_hasAttrs(CXCursor C);
2648
2649/**
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00002650 * \brief Determine whether the given cursor kind represents an invalid
Douglas Gregor6007cf22010-01-22 22:29:16 +00002651 * cursor.
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00002652 */
Douglas Gregor6007cf22010-01-22 22:29:16 +00002653CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_isInvalid(enum CXCursorKind);
2654
2655/**
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00002656 * \brief Determine whether the given cursor kind represents a translation
2657 * unit.
Douglas Gregor6007cf22010-01-22 22:29:16 +00002658 */
2659CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_isTranslationUnit(enum CXCursorKind);
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00002660
Ted Kremenekff9021b2010-03-08 21:17:29 +00002661/***
Douglas Gregor92a524f2010-03-18 00:42:48 +00002662 * \brief Determine whether the given cursor represents a preprocessing
2663 * element, such as a preprocessor directive or macro instantiation.
2664 */
2665CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_isPreprocessing(enum CXCursorKind);
2666
2667/***
Ted Kremenekff9021b2010-03-08 21:17:29 +00002668 * \brief Determine whether the given cursor represents a currently
2669 * unexposed piece of the AST (e.g., CXCursor_UnexposedStmt).
2670 */
2671CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_isUnexposed(enum CXCursorKind);
2672
Douglas Gregor6007cf22010-01-22 22:29:16 +00002673/**
Ted Kremenekfb4961d2010-03-03 06:36:57 +00002674 * \brief Describe the linkage of the entity referred to by a cursor.
2675 */
2676enum CXLinkageKind {
2677 /** \brief This value indicates that no linkage information is available
2678 * for a provided CXCursor. */
2679 CXLinkage_Invalid,
2680 /**
2681 * \brief This is the linkage for variables, parameters, and so on that
2682 * have automatic storage. This covers normal (non-extern) local variables.
2683 */
2684 CXLinkage_NoLinkage,
2685 /** \brief This is the linkage for static variables and static functions. */
2686 CXLinkage_Internal,
2687 /** \brief This is the linkage for entities with external linkage that live
2688 * in C++ anonymous namespaces.*/
2689 CXLinkage_UniqueExternal,
2690 /** \brief This is the linkage for entities with true, external linkage. */
2691 CXLinkage_External
2692};
2693
2694/**
Ted Kremenek4ed29252010-04-12 21:22:16 +00002695 * \brief Determine the linkage of the entity referred to by a given cursor.
Ted Kremenekfb4961d2010-03-03 06:36:57 +00002696 */
2697CINDEX_LINKAGE enum CXLinkageKind clang_getCursorLinkage(CXCursor cursor);
2698
Ehsan Akhgarib743de72016-05-31 15:55:51 +00002699enum CXVisibilityKind {
2700 /** \brief This value indicates that no visibility information is available
2701 * for a provided CXCursor. */
2702 CXVisibility_Invalid,
2703
2704 /** \brief Symbol not seen by the linker. */
2705 CXVisibility_Hidden,
2706 /** \brief Symbol seen by the linker but resolves to a symbol inside this object. */
2707 CXVisibility_Protected,
2708 /** \brief Symbol seen by the linker and acts like a normal symbol. */
2709 CXVisibility_Default
2710};
2711
2712/**
2713 * \brief Describe the visibility of the entity referred to by a cursor.
2714 *
2715 * This returns the default visibility if not explicitly specified by
2716 * a visibility attribute. The default visibility may be changed by
2717 * commandline arguments.
2718 *
2719 * \param cursor The cursor to query.
2720 *
2721 * \returns The visibility of the cursor.
2722 */
2723CINDEX_LINKAGE enum CXVisibilityKind clang_getCursorVisibility(CXCursor cursor);
2724
Ehsan Akhgari93697fa2015-11-23 19:56:46 +00002725/**
Douglas Gregord6225d32012-05-08 00:14:45 +00002726 * \brief Determine the availability of the entity that this cursor refers to,
2727 * taking the current target platform into account.
Douglas Gregorf757a122010-08-23 23:00:57 +00002728 *
2729 * \param cursor The cursor to query.
2730 *
2731 * \returns The availability of the cursor.
2732 */
2733CINDEX_LINKAGE enum CXAvailabilityKind
2734clang_getCursorAvailability(CXCursor cursor);
2735
2736/**
Douglas Gregord6225d32012-05-08 00:14:45 +00002737 * Describes the availability of a given entity on a particular platform, e.g.,
2738 * a particular class might only be available on Mac OS 10.7 or newer.
2739 */
2740typedef struct CXPlatformAvailability {
2741 /**
2742 * \brief A string that describes the platform for which this structure
2743 * provides availability information.
2744 *
Manman Renccf25bb2016-06-28 20:55:30 +00002745 * Possible values are "ios" or "macos".
Douglas Gregord6225d32012-05-08 00:14:45 +00002746 */
2747 CXString Platform;
2748 /**
2749 * \brief The version number in which this entity was introduced.
2750 */
2751 CXVersion Introduced;
2752 /**
2753 * \brief The version number in which this entity was deprecated (but is
2754 * still available).
2755 */
2756 CXVersion Deprecated;
2757 /**
2758 * \brief The version number in which this entity was obsoleted, and therefore
2759 * is no longer available.
2760 */
2761 CXVersion Obsoleted;
2762 /**
2763 * \brief Whether the entity is unconditionally unavailable on this platform.
2764 */
2765 int Unavailable;
2766 /**
2767 * \brief An optional message to provide to a user of this API, e.g., to
2768 * suggest replacement APIs.
2769 */
2770 CXString Message;
2771} CXPlatformAvailability;
2772
2773/**
2774 * \brief Determine the availability of the entity that this cursor refers to
2775 * on any platforms for which availability information is known.
2776 *
2777 * \param cursor The cursor to query.
2778 *
2779 * \param always_deprecated If non-NULL, will be set to indicate whether the
2780 * entity is deprecated on all platforms.
2781 *
2782 * \param deprecated_message If non-NULL, will be set to the message text
2783 * provided along with the unconditional deprecation of this entity. The client
2784 * is responsible for deallocating this string.
2785 *
James Dennett574cb4c2012-06-15 05:41:51 +00002786 * \param always_unavailable If non-NULL, will be set to indicate whether the
Douglas Gregord6225d32012-05-08 00:14:45 +00002787 * entity is unavailable on all platforms.
2788 *
2789 * \param unavailable_message If non-NULL, will be set to the message text
2790 * provided along with the unconditional unavailability of this entity. The
2791 * client is responsible for deallocating this string.
2792 *
2793 * \param availability If non-NULL, an array of CXPlatformAvailability instances
2794 * that will be populated with platform availability information, up to either
2795 * the number of platforms for which availability information is available (as
2796 * returned by this function) or \c availability_size, whichever is smaller.
2797 *
2798 * \param availability_size The number of elements available in the
2799 * \c availability array.
2800 *
2801 * \returns The number of platforms (N) for which availability information is
2802 * available (which is unrelated to \c availability_size).
2803 *
2804 * Note that the client is responsible for calling
2805 * \c clang_disposeCXPlatformAvailability to free each of the
2806 * platform-availability structures returned. There are
2807 * \c min(N, availability_size) such structures.
2808 */
2809CINDEX_LINKAGE int
2810clang_getCursorPlatformAvailability(CXCursor cursor,
2811 int *always_deprecated,
2812 CXString *deprecated_message,
2813 int *always_unavailable,
2814 CXString *unavailable_message,
2815 CXPlatformAvailability *availability,
2816 int availability_size);
2817
2818/**
2819 * \brief Free the memory associated with a \c CXPlatformAvailability structure.
2820 */
2821CINDEX_LINKAGE void
2822clang_disposeCXPlatformAvailability(CXPlatformAvailability *availability);
2823
2824/**
Ted Kremenek4ed29252010-04-12 21:22:16 +00002825 * \brief Describe the "language" of the entity referred to by a cursor.
2826 */
Reid Kleckner9e3bc722013-12-30 17:48:49 +00002827enum CXLanguageKind {
Ted Kremenekee457512010-04-14 20:58:32 +00002828 CXLanguage_Invalid = 0,
Ted Kremenek4ed29252010-04-12 21:22:16 +00002829 CXLanguage_C,
2830 CXLanguage_ObjC,
Ted Kremenekee457512010-04-14 20:58:32 +00002831 CXLanguage_CPlusPlus
Ted Kremenek4ed29252010-04-12 21:22:16 +00002832};
2833
2834/**
2835 * \brief Determine the "language" of the entity referred to by a given cursor.
2836 */
2837CINDEX_LINKAGE enum CXLanguageKind clang_getCursorLanguage(CXCursor cursor);
2838
Argyrios Kyrtzidisd6e9fa52011-09-27 00:30:30 +00002839/**
2840 * \brief Returns the translation unit that a cursor originated from.
2841 */
2842CINDEX_LINKAGE CXTranslationUnit clang_Cursor_getTranslationUnit(CXCursor);
2843
Ted Kremenekc0b98662013-04-24 07:17:12 +00002844/**
2845 * \brief A fast container representing a set of CXCursors.
2846 */
2847typedef struct CXCursorSetImpl *CXCursorSet;
2848
2849/**
2850 * \brief Creates an empty CXCursorSet.
2851 */
2852CINDEX_LINKAGE CXCursorSet clang_createCXCursorSet(void);
2853
2854/**
2855 * \brief Disposes a CXCursorSet and releases its associated memory.
2856 */
2857CINDEX_LINKAGE void clang_disposeCXCursorSet(CXCursorSet cset);
2858
2859/**
2860 * \brief Queries a CXCursorSet to see if it contains a specific CXCursor.
2861 *
2862 * \returns non-zero if the set contains the specified cursor.
2863*/
2864CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_CXCursorSet_contains(CXCursorSet cset,
2865 CXCursor cursor);
2866
2867/**
2868 * \brief Inserts a CXCursor into a CXCursorSet.
2869 *
2870 * \returns zero if the CXCursor was already in the set, and non-zero otherwise.
2871*/
2872CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_CXCursorSet_insert(CXCursorSet cset,
2873 CXCursor cursor);
2874
Douglas Gregor0576ce72010-09-22 21:22:29 +00002875/**
2876 * \brief Determine the semantic parent of the given cursor.
2877 *
2878 * The semantic parent of a cursor is the cursor that semantically contains
2879 * the given \p cursor. For many declarations, the lexical and semantic parents
2880 * are equivalent (the lexical parent is returned by
2881 * \c clang_getCursorLexicalParent()). They diverge when declarations or
2882 * definitions are provided out-of-line. For example:
2883 *
2884 * \code
2885 * class C {
2886 * void f();
2887 * };
2888 *
2889 * void C::f() { }
2890 * \endcode
2891 *
Nico Weber7deebef2014-04-24 03:17:47 +00002892 * In the out-of-line definition of \c C::f, the semantic parent is
Douglas Gregor0576ce72010-09-22 21:22:29 +00002893 * the class \c C, of which this function is a member. The lexical parent is
2894 * the place where the declaration actually occurs in the source code; in this
Nico Weber7deebef2014-04-24 03:17:47 +00002895 * case, the definition occurs in the translation unit. In general, the
Douglas Gregor0576ce72010-09-22 21:22:29 +00002896 * lexical parent for a given entity can change without affecting the semantics
2897 * of the program, and the lexical parent of different declarations of the
2898 * same entity may be different. Changing the semantic parent of a declaration,
2899 * on the other hand, can have a major impact on semantics, and redeclarations
2900 * of a particular entity should all have the same semantic context.
2901 *
2902 * In the example above, both declarations of \c C::f have \c C as their
2903 * semantic context, while the lexical context of the first \c C::f is \c C
2904 * and the lexical context of the second \c C::f is the translation unit.
Douglas Gregor7ecd19e2010-12-21 07:55:45 +00002905 *
2906 * For global declarations, the semantic parent is the translation unit.
Douglas Gregor0576ce72010-09-22 21:22:29 +00002907 */
2908CINDEX_LINKAGE CXCursor clang_getCursorSemanticParent(CXCursor cursor);
2909
2910/**
2911 * \brief Determine the lexical parent of the given cursor.
2912 *
2913 * The lexical parent of a cursor is the cursor in which the given \p cursor
2914 * was actually written. For many declarations, the lexical and semantic parents
2915 * are equivalent (the semantic parent is returned by
2916 * \c clang_getCursorSemanticParent()). They diverge when declarations or
2917 * definitions are provided out-of-line. For example:
2918 *
2919 * \code
2920 * class C {
2921 * void f();
2922 * };
2923 *
2924 * void C::f() { }
2925 * \endcode
2926 *
Nico Weber7deebef2014-04-24 03:17:47 +00002927 * In the out-of-line definition of \c C::f, the semantic parent is
Douglas Gregor0576ce72010-09-22 21:22:29 +00002928 * the class \c C, of which this function is a member. The lexical parent is
2929 * the place where the declaration actually occurs in the source code; in this
Nico Weber7deebef2014-04-24 03:17:47 +00002930 * case, the definition occurs in the translation unit. In general, the
Douglas Gregor0576ce72010-09-22 21:22:29 +00002931 * lexical parent for a given entity can change without affecting the semantics
2932 * of the program, and the lexical parent of different declarations of the
2933 * same entity may be different. Changing the semantic parent of a declaration,
2934 * on the other hand, can have a major impact on semantics, and redeclarations
2935 * of a particular entity should all have the same semantic context.
2936 *
2937 * In the example above, both declarations of \c C::f have \c C as their
2938 * semantic context, while the lexical context of the first \c C::f is \c C
2939 * and the lexical context of the second \c C::f is the translation unit.
Douglas Gregor7ecd19e2010-12-21 07:55:45 +00002940 *
2941 * For declarations written in the global scope, the lexical parent is
2942 * the translation unit.
Douglas Gregor0576ce72010-09-22 21:22:29 +00002943 */
2944CINDEX_LINKAGE CXCursor clang_getCursorLexicalParent(CXCursor cursor);
Douglas Gregor99a26af2010-10-01 20:25:15 +00002945
2946/**
2947 * \brief Determine the set of methods that are overridden by the given
2948 * method.
2949 *
2950 * In both Objective-C and C++, a method (aka virtual member function,
2951 * in C++) can override a virtual method in a base class. For
2952 * Objective-C, a method is said to override any method in the class's
Argyrios Kyrtzidisbfb24252012-03-08 00:20:03 +00002953 * base class, its protocols, or its categories' protocols, that has the same
2954 * selector and is of the same kind (class or instance).
2955 * If no such method exists, the search continues to the class's superclass,
2956 * its protocols, and its categories, and so on. A method from an Objective-C
2957 * implementation is considered to override the same methods as its
2958 * corresponding method in the interface.
Douglas Gregor99a26af2010-10-01 20:25:15 +00002959 *
2960 * For C++, a virtual member function overrides any virtual member
2961 * function with the same signature that occurs in its base
2962 * classes. With multiple inheritance, a virtual member function can
2963 * override several virtual member functions coming from different
2964 * base classes.
2965 *
2966 * In all cases, this function determines the immediate overridden
2967 * method, rather than all of the overridden methods. For example, if
2968 * a method is originally declared in a class A, then overridden in B
2969 * (which in inherits from A) and also in C (which inherited from B),
2970 * then the only overridden method returned from this function when
2971 * invoked on C's method will be B's method. The client may then
2972 * invoke this function again, given the previously-found overridden
2973 * methods, to map out the complete method-override set.
2974 *
2975 * \param cursor A cursor representing an Objective-C or C++
2976 * method. This routine will compute the set of methods that this
2977 * method overrides.
2978 *
2979 * \param overridden A pointer whose pointee will be replaced with a
2980 * pointer to an array of cursors, representing the set of overridden
2981 * methods. If there are no overridden methods, the pointee will be
2982 * set to NULL. The pointee must be freed via a call to
2983 * \c clang_disposeOverriddenCursors().
2984 *
2985 * \param num_overridden A pointer to the number of overridden
2986 * functions, will be set to the number of overridden functions in the
2987 * array pointed to by \p overridden.
2988 */
2989CINDEX_LINKAGE void clang_getOverriddenCursors(CXCursor cursor,
2990 CXCursor **overridden,
2991 unsigned *num_overridden);
2992
2993/**
2994 * \brief Free the set of overridden cursors returned by \c
2995 * clang_getOverriddenCursors().
2996 */
2997CINDEX_LINKAGE void clang_disposeOverriddenCursors(CXCursor *overridden);
2998
Ted Kremenek4ed29252010-04-12 21:22:16 +00002999/**
Douglas Gregor796d76a2010-10-20 22:00:55 +00003000 * \brief Retrieve the file that is included by the given inclusion directive
3001 * cursor.
3002 */
3003CINDEX_LINKAGE CXFile clang_getIncludedFile(CXCursor cursor);
3004
3005/**
Douglas Gregor6007cf22010-01-22 22:29:16 +00003006 * @}
3007 */
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00003008
Douglas Gregor6007cf22010-01-22 22:29:16 +00003009/**
3010 * \defgroup CINDEX_CURSOR_SOURCE Mapping between cursors and source code
3011 *
3012 * Cursors represent a location within the Abstract Syntax Tree (AST). These
3013 * routines help map between cursors and the physical locations where the
3014 * described entities occur in the source code. The mapping is provided in
3015 * both directions, so one can map from source code to the AST and back.
3016 *
3017 * @{
Steve Naroffa1c72842009-08-28 15:28:48 +00003018 */
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00003019
Steve Naroff20bad0b2009-10-21 13:56:23 +00003020/**
Douglas Gregor816fd362010-01-22 21:44:22 +00003021 * \brief Map a source location to the cursor that describes the entity at that
3022 * location in the source code.
3023 *
3024 * clang_getCursor() maps an arbitrary source location within a translation
3025 * unit down to the most specific cursor that describes the entity at that
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00003026 * location. For example, given an expression \c x + y, invoking
Douglas Gregor816fd362010-01-22 21:44:22 +00003027 * clang_getCursor() with a source location pointing to "x" will return the
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00003028 * cursor for "x"; similarly for "y". If the cursor points anywhere between
Douglas Gregor816fd362010-01-22 21:44:22 +00003029 * "x" or "y" (e.g., on the + or the whitespace around it), clang_getCursor()
3030 * will return a cursor referring to the "+" expression.
3031 *
3032 * \returns a cursor representing the entity at the given source location, or
3033 * a NULL cursor if no such entity can be found.
Steve Naroff20bad0b2009-10-21 13:56:23 +00003034 */
Douglas Gregor816fd362010-01-22 21:44:22 +00003035CINDEX_LINKAGE CXCursor clang_getCursor(CXTranslationUnit, CXSourceLocation);
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00003036
Douglas Gregor66a58812010-01-18 22:46:11 +00003037/**
3038 * \brief Retrieve the physical location of the source constructor referenced
3039 * by the given cursor.
3040 *
3041 * The location of a declaration is typically the location of the name of that
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00003042 * declaration, where the name of that declaration would occur if it is
3043 * unnamed, or some keyword that introduces that particular declaration.
3044 * The location of a reference is where that reference occurs within the
Douglas Gregor66a58812010-01-18 22:46:11 +00003045 * source code.
3046 */
3047CINDEX_LINKAGE CXSourceLocation clang_getCursorLocation(CXCursor);
Douglas Gregor6007cf22010-01-22 22:29:16 +00003048
Douglas Gregor6b8232f2010-01-19 19:34:47 +00003049/**
3050 * \brief Retrieve the physical extent of the source construct referenced by
Douglas Gregor33c34ac2010-01-19 00:34:46 +00003051 * the given cursor.
3052 *
3053 * The extent of a cursor starts with the file/line/column pointing at the
3054 * first character within the source construct that the cursor refers to and
Nico Weber7deebef2014-04-24 03:17:47 +00003055 * ends with the last character within that source construct. For a
Douglas Gregor33c34ac2010-01-19 00:34:46 +00003056 * declaration, the extent covers the declaration itself. For a reference,
3057 * the extent covers the location of the reference (e.g., where the referenced
3058 * entity was actually used).
3059 */
3060CINDEX_LINKAGE CXSourceRange clang_getCursorExtent(CXCursor);
Douglas Gregorad27e8b2010-01-19 01:20:04 +00003061
Douglas Gregor6007cf22010-01-22 22:29:16 +00003062/**
3063 * @}
3064 */
Ted Kremeneka5940822010-08-26 01:42:22 +00003065
Douglas Gregor6007cf22010-01-22 22:29:16 +00003066/**
Ted Kremenek6bca9842010-05-14 21:29:26 +00003067 * \defgroup CINDEX_TYPES Type information for CXCursors
3068 *
3069 * @{
3070 */
3071
3072/**
3073 * \brief Describes the kind of type
3074 */
3075enum CXTypeKind {
3076 /**
Nico Weber7deebef2014-04-24 03:17:47 +00003077 * \brief Represents an invalid type (e.g., where no type is available).
Ted Kremenek6bca9842010-05-14 21:29:26 +00003078 */
3079 CXType_Invalid = 0,
3080
3081 /**
3082 * \brief A type whose specific kind is not exposed via this
3083 * interface.
3084 */
3085 CXType_Unexposed = 1,
3086
3087 /* Builtin types */
3088 CXType_Void = 2,
3089 CXType_Bool = 3,
3090 CXType_Char_U = 4,
3091 CXType_UChar = 5,
3092 CXType_Char16 = 6,
3093 CXType_Char32 = 7,
3094 CXType_UShort = 8,
3095 CXType_UInt = 9,
3096 CXType_ULong = 10,
3097 CXType_ULongLong = 11,
3098 CXType_UInt128 = 12,
3099 CXType_Char_S = 13,
3100 CXType_SChar = 14,
3101 CXType_WChar = 15,
3102 CXType_Short = 16,
3103 CXType_Int = 17,
3104 CXType_Long = 18,
3105 CXType_LongLong = 19,
3106 CXType_Int128 = 20,
3107 CXType_Float = 21,
3108 CXType_Double = 22,
3109 CXType_LongDouble = 23,
3110 CXType_NullPtr = 24,
3111 CXType_Overload = 25,
3112 CXType_Dependent = 26,
3113 CXType_ObjCId = 27,
3114 CXType_ObjCClass = 28,
3115 CXType_ObjCSel = 29,
Nemanja Ivanovicbb1ea2d2016-05-09 08:52:33 +00003116 CXType_Float128 = 30,
Joey Gouly6ea21852017-02-10 15:51:11 +00003117 CXType_Half = 31,
Ted Kremenek6bca9842010-05-14 21:29:26 +00003118 CXType_FirstBuiltin = CXType_Void,
Joey Gouly6ea21852017-02-10 15:51:11 +00003119 CXType_LastBuiltin = CXType_Half,
Ted Kremenek6bca9842010-05-14 21:29:26 +00003120
3121 CXType_Complex = 100,
3122 CXType_Pointer = 101,
3123 CXType_BlockPointer = 102,
3124 CXType_LValueReference = 103,
3125 CXType_RValueReference = 104,
3126 CXType_Record = 105,
3127 CXType_Enum = 106,
3128 CXType_Typedef = 107,
3129 CXType_ObjCInterface = 108,
Ted Kremenekc1508872010-06-21 20:15:39 +00003130 CXType_ObjCObjectPointer = 109,
3131 CXType_FunctionNoProto = 110,
Argyrios Kyrtzidis2b0cf602011-09-27 17:44:34 +00003132 CXType_FunctionProto = 111,
Argyrios Kyrtzidis66f433a2011-12-06 22:05:01 +00003133 CXType_ConstantArray = 112,
Argyrios Kyrtzidis0661a712013-07-23 17:36:21 +00003134 CXType_Vector = 113,
3135 CXType_IncompleteArray = 114,
3136 CXType_VariableArray = 115,
Argyrios Kyrtzidis7a4253b2013-10-03 16:19:23 +00003137 CXType_DependentSizedArray = 116,
Sergey Kalinichevc0151202015-11-15 13:10:10 +00003138 CXType_MemberPointer = 117,
Sergey Kalinichev69770ae2016-05-03 06:58:29 +00003139 CXType_Auto = 118,
3140
3141 /**
3142 * \brief Represents a type that was referred to using an elaborated type keyword.
3143 *
3144 * E.g., struct S, or via a qualified name, e.g., N::M::type, or both.
3145 */
Sven van Haastregtcc4f1e42017-05-23 10:36:43 +00003146 CXType_Elaborated = 119,
3147
3148 /* OpenCL PipeType. */
3149 CXType_Pipe = 120,
3150
3151 /* OpenCL builtin types. */
3152 CXType_OCLImage1dRO = 121,
3153 CXType_OCLImage1dArrayRO = 122,
3154 CXType_OCLImage1dBufferRO = 123,
3155 CXType_OCLImage2dRO = 124,
3156 CXType_OCLImage2dArrayRO = 125,
3157 CXType_OCLImage2dDepthRO = 126,
3158 CXType_OCLImage2dArrayDepthRO = 127,
3159 CXType_OCLImage2dMSAARO = 128,
3160 CXType_OCLImage2dArrayMSAARO = 129,
3161 CXType_OCLImage2dMSAADepthRO = 130,
3162 CXType_OCLImage2dArrayMSAADepthRO = 131,
3163 CXType_OCLImage3dRO = 132,
3164 CXType_OCLImage1dWO = 133,
3165 CXType_OCLImage1dArrayWO = 134,
3166 CXType_OCLImage1dBufferWO = 135,
3167 CXType_OCLImage2dWO = 136,
3168 CXType_OCLImage2dArrayWO = 137,
3169 CXType_OCLImage2dDepthWO = 138,
3170 CXType_OCLImage2dArrayDepthWO = 139,
3171 CXType_OCLImage2dMSAAWO = 140,
3172 CXType_OCLImage2dArrayMSAAWO = 141,
3173 CXType_OCLImage2dMSAADepthWO = 142,
3174 CXType_OCLImage2dArrayMSAADepthWO = 143,
3175 CXType_OCLImage3dWO = 144,
3176 CXType_OCLImage1dRW = 145,
3177 CXType_OCLImage1dArrayRW = 146,
3178 CXType_OCLImage1dBufferRW = 147,
3179 CXType_OCLImage2dRW = 148,
3180 CXType_OCLImage2dArrayRW = 149,
3181 CXType_OCLImage2dDepthRW = 150,
3182 CXType_OCLImage2dArrayDepthRW = 151,
3183 CXType_OCLImage2dMSAARW = 152,
3184 CXType_OCLImage2dArrayMSAARW = 153,
3185 CXType_OCLImage2dMSAADepthRW = 154,
3186 CXType_OCLImage2dArrayMSAADepthRW = 155,
3187 CXType_OCLImage3dRW = 156,
3188 CXType_OCLSampler = 157,
3189 CXType_OCLEvent = 158,
3190 CXType_OCLQueue = 159,
3191 CXType_OCLReserveID = 160
Ted Kremenek6bca9842010-05-14 21:29:26 +00003192};
3193
3194/**
Argyrios Kyrtzidis66f433a2011-12-06 22:05:01 +00003195 * \brief Describes the calling convention of a function type
3196 */
3197enum CXCallingConv {
3198 CXCallingConv_Default = 0,
3199 CXCallingConv_C = 1,
3200 CXCallingConv_X86StdCall = 2,
3201 CXCallingConv_X86FastCall = 3,
3202 CXCallingConv_X86ThisCall = 4,
3203 CXCallingConv_X86Pascal = 5,
3204 CXCallingConv_AAPCS = 6,
3205 CXCallingConv_AAPCS_VFP = 7,
Erich Keane757d3172016-11-02 18:29:35 +00003206 CXCallingConv_X86RegCall = 8,
Guy Benyeif0a014b2012-12-25 08:53:55 +00003207 CXCallingConv_IntelOclBicc = 9,
Martin Storsjo022e7822017-07-17 20:49:45 +00003208 CXCallingConv_Win64 = 10,
Nikolai Bozhenovce25d412017-08-08 14:13:50 +00003209 /* Alias for compatibility with older versions of API. */
3210 CXCallingConv_X86_64Win64 = CXCallingConv_Win64,
Charles Davisb5a214e2013-08-30 04:39:01 +00003211 CXCallingConv_X86_64SysV = 11,
Reid Klecknerd7857f02014-10-24 17:42:17 +00003212 CXCallingConv_X86VectorCall = 12,
John McCall477f2bb2016-03-03 06:39:32 +00003213 CXCallingConv_Swift = 13,
Roman Levenstein35aa5ce2016-03-16 18:00:46 +00003214 CXCallingConv_PreserveMost = 14,
3215 CXCallingConv_PreserveAll = 15,
Argyrios Kyrtzidis66f433a2011-12-06 22:05:01 +00003216
3217 CXCallingConv_Invalid = 100,
3218 CXCallingConv_Unexposed = 200
3219};
3220
Argyrios Kyrtzidis66f433a2011-12-06 22:05:01 +00003221/**
Ted Kremenek6bca9842010-05-14 21:29:26 +00003222 * \brief The type of an element in the abstract syntax tree.
3223 *
3224 */
3225typedef struct {
3226 enum CXTypeKind kind;
3227 void *data[2];
3228} CXType;
3229
3230/**
3231 * \brief Retrieve the type of a CXCursor (if any).
3232 */
3233CINDEX_LINKAGE CXType clang_getCursorType(CXCursor C);
3234
3235/**
Dmitri Gribenko00353722013-02-15 21:15:49 +00003236 * \brief Pretty-print the underlying type using the rules of the
3237 * language of the translation unit from which it came.
3238 *
3239 * If the type is invalid, an empty string is returned.
3240 */
3241CINDEX_LINKAGE CXString clang_getTypeSpelling(CXType CT);
3242
3243/**
Argyrios Kyrtzidis66f433a2011-12-06 22:05:01 +00003244 * \brief Retrieve the underlying type of a typedef declaration.
3245 *
3246 * If the cursor does not reference a typedef declaration, an invalid type is
3247 * returned.
3248 */
3249CINDEX_LINKAGE CXType clang_getTypedefDeclUnderlyingType(CXCursor C);
3250
3251/**
3252 * \brief Retrieve the integer type of an enum declaration.
3253 *
3254 * If the cursor does not reference an enum declaration, an invalid type is
3255 * returned.
3256 */
3257CINDEX_LINKAGE CXType clang_getEnumDeclIntegerType(CXCursor C);
3258
3259/**
3260 * \brief Retrieve the integer value of an enum constant declaration as a signed
3261 * long long.
3262 *
3263 * If the cursor does not reference an enum constant declaration, LLONG_MIN is returned.
3264 * Since this is also potentially a valid constant value, the kind of the cursor
3265 * must be verified before calling this function.
3266 */
3267CINDEX_LINKAGE long long clang_getEnumConstantDeclValue(CXCursor C);
3268
3269/**
3270 * \brief Retrieve the integer value of an enum constant declaration as an unsigned
3271 * long long.
3272 *
3273 * If the cursor does not reference an enum constant declaration, ULLONG_MAX is returned.
3274 * Since this is also potentially a valid constant value, the kind of the cursor
3275 * must be verified before calling this function.
3276 */
3277CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned long long clang_getEnumConstantDeclUnsignedValue(CXCursor C);
3278
3279/**
Dmitri Gribenkob506ba12012-12-04 15:13:46 +00003280 * \brief Retrieve the bit width of a bit field declaration as an integer.
3281 *
3282 * If a cursor that is not a bit field declaration is passed in, -1 is returned.
3283 */
3284CINDEX_LINKAGE int clang_getFieldDeclBitWidth(CXCursor C);
3285
3286/**
Argyrios Kyrtzidis0c27e4b2012-04-11 19:32:19 +00003287 * \brief Retrieve the number of non-variadic arguments associated with a given
3288 * cursor.
3289 *
Argyrios Kyrtzidisb2792972013-04-01 17:38:59 +00003290 * The number of arguments can be determined for calls as well as for
3291 * declarations of functions or methods. For other cursors -1 is returned.
Argyrios Kyrtzidis0c27e4b2012-04-11 19:32:19 +00003292 */
3293CINDEX_LINKAGE int clang_Cursor_getNumArguments(CXCursor C);
3294
3295/**
3296 * \brief Retrieve the argument cursor of a function or method.
3297 *
Argyrios Kyrtzidisb2792972013-04-01 17:38:59 +00003298 * The argument cursor can be determined for calls as well as for declarations
3299 * of functions or methods. For other cursors and for invalid indices, an
3300 * invalid cursor is returned.
Argyrios Kyrtzidis0c27e4b2012-04-11 19:32:19 +00003301 */
3302CINDEX_LINKAGE CXCursor clang_Cursor_getArgument(CXCursor C, unsigned i);
3303
3304/**
Eli Benderskyc27a0c42014-10-10 20:01:05 +00003305 * \brief Describes the kind of a template argument.
3306 *
3307 * See the definition of llvm::clang::TemplateArgument::ArgKind for full
3308 * element descriptions.
3309 */
3310enum CXTemplateArgumentKind {
3311 CXTemplateArgumentKind_Null,
3312 CXTemplateArgumentKind_Type,
3313 CXTemplateArgumentKind_Declaration,
3314 CXTemplateArgumentKind_NullPtr,
3315 CXTemplateArgumentKind_Integral,
3316 CXTemplateArgumentKind_Template,
3317 CXTemplateArgumentKind_TemplateExpansion,
3318 CXTemplateArgumentKind_Expression,
3319 CXTemplateArgumentKind_Pack,
3320 /* Indicates an error case, preventing the kind from being deduced. */
3321 CXTemplateArgumentKind_Invalid
3322};
3323
3324/**
3325 *\brief Returns the number of template args of a function decl representing a
3326 * template specialization.
3327 *
3328 * If the argument cursor cannot be converted into a template function
3329 * declaration, -1 is returned.
3330 *
3331 * For example, for the following declaration and specialization:
3332 * template <typename T, int kInt, bool kBool>
3333 * void foo() { ... }
3334 *
3335 * template <>
3336 * void foo<float, -7, true>();
3337 *
3338 * The value 3 would be returned from this call.
3339 */
3340CINDEX_LINKAGE int clang_Cursor_getNumTemplateArguments(CXCursor C);
3341
3342/**
3343 * \brief Retrieve the kind of the I'th template argument of the CXCursor C.
3344 *
3345 * If the argument CXCursor does not represent a FunctionDecl, an invalid
3346 * template argument kind is returned.
3347 *
3348 * For example, for the following declaration and specialization:
3349 * template <typename T, int kInt, bool kBool>
3350 * void foo() { ... }
3351 *
3352 * template <>
3353 * void foo<float, -7, true>();
3354 *
3355 * For I = 0, 1, and 2, Type, Integral, and Integral will be returned,
3356 * respectively.
3357 */
3358CINDEX_LINKAGE enum CXTemplateArgumentKind clang_Cursor_getTemplateArgumentKind(
3359 CXCursor C, unsigned I);
3360
3361/**
3362 * \brief Retrieve a CXType representing the type of a TemplateArgument of a
3363 * function decl representing a template specialization.
3364 *
3365 * If the argument CXCursor does not represent a FunctionDecl whose I'th
3366 * template argument has a kind of CXTemplateArgKind_Integral, an invalid type
3367 * is returned.
3368 *
3369 * For example, for the following declaration and specialization:
3370 * template <typename T, int kInt, bool kBool>
3371 * void foo() { ... }
3372 *
3373 * template <>
3374 * void foo<float, -7, true>();
3375 *
3376 * If called with I = 0, "float", will be returned.
3377 * Invalid types will be returned for I == 1 or 2.
3378 */
3379CINDEX_LINKAGE CXType clang_Cursor_getTemplateArgumentType(CXCursor C,
3380 unsigned I);
3381
3382/**
3383 * \brief Retrieve the value of an Integral TemplateArgument (of a function
3384 * decl representing a template specialization) as a signed long long.
3385 *
3386 * It is undefined to call this function on a CXCursor that does not represent a
3387 * FunctionDecl or whose I'th template argument is not an integral value.
3388 *
3389 * For example, for the following declaration and specialization:
3390 * template <typename T, int kInt, bool kBool>
3391 * void foo() { ... }
3392 *
3393 * template <>
3394 * void foo<float, -7, true>();
3395 *
3396 * If called with I = 1 or 2, -7 or true will be returned, respectively.
3397 * For I == 0, this function's behavior is undefined.
3398 */
3399CINDEX_LINKAGE long long clang_Cursor_getTemplateArgumentValue(CXCursor C,
3400 unsigned I);
3401
3402/**
3403 * \brief Retrieve the value of an Integral TemplateArgument (of a function
3404 * decl representing a template specialization) as an unsigned long long.
3405 *
3406 * It is undefined to call this function on a CXCursor that does not represent a
3407 * FunctionDecl or whose I'th template argument is not an integral value.
3408 *
3409 * For example, for the following declaration and specialization:
3410 * template <typename T, int kInt, bool kBool>
3411 * void foo() { ... }
3412 *
3413 * template <>
3414 * void foo<float, 2147483649, true>();
3415 *
3416 * If called with I = 1 or 2, 2147483649 or true will be returned, respectively.
3417 * For I == 0, this function's behavior is undefined.
3418 */
3419CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned long long clang_Cursor_getTemplateArgumentUnsignedValue(
3420 CXCursor C, unsigned I);
3421
3422/**
James Dennett574cb4c2012-06-15 05:41:51 +00003423 * \brief Determine whether two CXTypes represent the same type.
Ted Kremenek6bca9842010-05-14 21:29:26 +00003424 *
James Dennett574cb4c2012-06-15 05:41:51 +00003425 * \returns non-zero if the CXTypes represent the same type and
3426 * zero otherwise.
Ted Kremenek6bca9842010-05-14 21:29:26 +00003427 */
3428CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_equalTypes(CXType A, CXType B);
3429
3430/**
3431 * \brief Return the canonical type for a CXType.
3432 *
3433 * Clang's type system explicitly models typedefs and all the ways
3434 * a specific type can be represented. The canonical type is the underlying
3435 * type with all the "sugar" removed. For example, if 'T' is a typedef
3436 * for 'int', the canonical type for 'T' would be 'int'.
3437 */
3438CINDEX_LINKAGE CXType clang_getCanonicalType(CXType T);
3439
3440/**
James Dennett574cb4c2012-06-15 05:41:51 +00003441 * \brief Determine whether a CXType has the "const" qualifier set,
3442 * without looking through typedefs that may have added "const" at a
3443 * different level.
Douglas Gregor56a63802011-01-27 16:27:11 +00003444 */
3445CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_isConstQualifiedType(CXType T);
3446
3447/**
Argyrios Kyrtzidis785705b2016-01-16 00:20:02 +00003448 * \brief Determine whether a CXCursor that is a macro, is
3449 * function like.
3450 */
3451CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_Cursor_isMacroFunctionLike(CXCursor C);
3452
3453/**
3454 * \brief Determine whether a CXCursor that is a macro, is a
3455 * builtin one.
3456 */
3457CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_Cursor_isMacroBuiltin(CXCursor C);
3458
3459/**
3460 * \brief Determine whether a CXCursor that is a function declaration, is an
3461 * inline declaration.
3462 */
3463CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_Cursor_isFunctionInlined(CXCursor C);
3464
3465/**
James Dennett574cb4c2012-06-15 05:41:51 +00003466 * \brief Determine whether a CXType has the "volatile" qualifier set,
3467 * without looking through typedefs that may have added "volatile" at
3468 * a different level.
Douglas Gregor56a63802011-01-27 16:27:11 +00003469 */
3470CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_isVolatileQualifiedType(CXType T);
3471
3472/**
James Dennett574cb4c2012-06-15 05:41:51 +00003473 * \brief Determine whether a CXType has the "restrict" qualifier set,
3474 * without looking through typedefs that may have added "restrict" at a
3475 * different level.
Douglas Gregor56a63802011-01-27 16:27:11 +00003476 */
3477CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_isRestrictQualifiedType(CXType T);
3478
3479/**
Sven van Haastregte8910422017-06-08 14:22:04 +00003480 * \brief Returns the address space of the given type.
3481 */
3482CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_getAddressSpace(CXType T);
3483
3484/**
3485 * \brief Returns the typedef name of the given type.
3486 */
3487CINDEX_LINKAGE CXString clang_getTypedefName(CXType CT);
3488
3489/**
Ted Kremenek6bca9842010-05-14 21:29:26 +00003490 * \brief For pointer types, returns the type of the pointee.
Ted Kremenek6bca9842010-05-14 21:29:26 +00003491 */
3492CINDEX_LINKAGE CXType clang_getPointeeType(CXType T);
3493
3494/**
3495 * \brief Return the cursor for the declaration of the given type.
3496 */
3497CINDEX_LINKAGE CXCursor clang_getTypeDeclaration(CXType T);
3498
David Chisnall50e4eba2010-12-30 14:05:53 +00003499/**
3500 * Returns the Objective-C type encoding for the specified declaration.
3501 */
3502CINDEX_LINKAGE CXString clang_getDeclObjCTypeEncoding(CXCursor C);
Ted Kremenek6bca9842010-05-14 21:29:26 +00003503
3504/**
Argyrios Kyrtzidis785705b2016-01-16 00:20:02 +00003505 * Returns the Objective-C type encoding for the specified CXType.
3506 */
3507CINDEX_LINKAGE CXString clang_Type_getObjCEncoding(CXType type);
3508
3509/**
Ted Kremenek6bca9842010-05-14 21:29:26 +00003510 * \brief Retrieve the spelling of a given CXTypeKind.
3511 */
3512CINDEX_LINKAGE CXString clang_getTypeKindSpelling(enum CXTypeKind K);
3513
3514/**
Argyrios Kyrtzidis66f433a2011-12-06 22:05:01 +00003515 * \brief Retrieve the calling convention associated with a function type.
3516 *
3517 * If a non-function type is passed in, CXCallingConv_Invalid is returned.
3518 */
3519CINDEX_LINKAGE enum CXCallingConv clang_getFunctionTypeCallingConv(CXType T);
3520
3521/**
Alp Toker314cc812014-01-25 16:55:45 +00003522 * \brief Retrieve the return type associated with a function type.
Argyrios Kyrtzidis66f433a2011-12-06 22:05:01 +00003523 *
3524 * If a non-function type is passed in, an invalid type is returned.
Ted Kremenekc1508872010-06-21 20:15:39 +00003525 */
3526CINDEX_LINKAGE CXType clang_getResultType(CXType T);
3527
3528/**
Jonathan Coe0a5b03b2017-06-27 22:54:56 +00003529 * \brief Retrieve the exception specification type associated with a function type.
3530 *
3531 * If a non-function type is passed in, an error code of -1 is returned.
3532 */
3533CINDEX_LINKAGE int clang_getExceptionSpecificationType(CXType T);
3534
3535/**
Alp Toker601b22c2014-01-21 23:35:24 +00003536 * \brief Retrieve the number of non-variadic parameters associated with a
James Dennett574cb4c2012-06-15 05:41:51 +00003537 * function type.
Argyrios Kyrtzidis66f433a2011-12-06 22:05:01 +00003538 *
Argyrios Kyrtzidis0c27e4b2012-04-11 19:32:19 +00003539 * If a non-function type is passed in, -1 is returned.
Argyrios Kyrtzidis66f433a2011-12-06 22:05:01 +00003540 */
Argyrios Kyrtzidis0c27e4b2012-04-11 19:32:19 +00003541CINDEX_LINKAGE int clang_getNumArgTypes(CXType T);
Argyrios Kyrtzidis66f433a2011-12-06 22:05:01 +00003542
3543/**
Alp Toker601b22c2014-01-21 23:35:24 +00003544 * \brief Retrieve the type of a parameter of a function type.
Argyrios Kyrtzidis66f433a2011-12-06 22:05:01 +00003545 *
James Dennett574cb4c2012-06-15 05:41:51 +00003546 * If a non-function type is passed in or the function does not have enough
3547 * parameters, an invalid type is returned.
Argyrios Kyrtzidis66f433a2011-12-06 22:05:01 +00003548 */
3549CINDEX_LINKAGE CXType clang_getArgType(CXType T, unsigned i);
3550
3551/**
3552 * \brief Return 1 if the CXType is a variadic function type, and 0 otherwise.
Argyrios Kyrtzidis66f433a2011-12-06 22:05:01 +00003553 */
3554CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_isFunctionTypeVariadic(CXType T);
3555
3556/**
Alp Toker314cc812014-01-25 16:55:45 +00003557 * \brief Retrieve the return type associated with a given cursor.
Argyrios Kyrtzidis66f433a2011-12-06 22:05:01 +00003558 *
3559 * This only returns a valid type if the cursor refers to a function or method.
Ted Kremenekc62ab8d2010-06-21 20:48:56 +00003560 */
3561CINDEX_LINKAGE CXType clang_getCursorResultType(CXCursor C);
3562
3563/**
Jonathan Coe0a5b03b2017-06-27 22:54:56 +00003564 * \brief Retrieve the exception specification type associated with a given cursor.
3565 *
3566 * This only returns a valid result if the cursor refers to a function or method.
3567 */
3568CINDEX_LINKAGE int clang_getCursorExceptionSpecificationType(CXCursor C);
3569
3570/**
Ted Kremenek0c7476a2010-07-30 00:14:11 +00003571 * \brief Return 1 if the CXType is a POD (plain old data) type, and 0
3572 * otherwise.
3573 */
3574CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_isPODType(CXType T);
3575
3576/**
Argyrios Kyrtzidis66f433a2011-12-06 22:05:01 +00003577 * \brief Return the element type of an array, complex, or vector type.
3578 *
3579 * If a type is passed in that is not an array, complex, or vector type,
3580 * an invalid type is returned.
3581 */
3582CINDEX_LINKAGE CXType clang_getElementType(CXType T);
3583
3584/**
3585 * \brief Return the number of elements of an array or vector type.
3586 *
3587 * If a type is passed in that is not an array or vector type,
3588 * -1 is returned.
3589 */
3590CINDEX_LINKAGE long long clang_getNumElements(CXType T);
3591
3592/**
Argyrios Kyrtzidis2b0cf602011-09-27 17:44:34 +00003593 * \brief Return the element type of an array type.
3594 *
3595 * If a non-array type is passed in, an invalid type is returned.
3596 */
3597CINDEX_LINKAGE CXType clang_getArrayElementType(CXType T);
3598
3599/**
Sylvestre Ledru830885c2012-07-23 08:59:39 +00003600 * \brief Return the array size of a constant array.
Argyrios Kyrtzidis2b0cf602011-09-27 17:44:34 +00003601 *
3602 * If a non-array type is passed in, -1 is returned.
3603 */
3604CINDEX_LINKAGE long long clang_getArraySize(CXType T);
3605
3606/**
Sergey Kalinichev69770ae2016-05-03 06:58:29 +00003607 * \brief Retrieve the type named by the qualified-id.
3608 *
3609 * If a non-elaborated type is passed in, an invalid type is returned.
3610 */
3611CINDEX_LINKAGE CXType clang_Type_getNamedType(CXType T);
3612
3613/**
Argyrios Kyrtzidis3b25c912017-03-21 16:56:02 +00003614 * \brief Determine if a typedef is 'transparent' tag.
3615 *
3616 * A typedef is considered 'transparent' if it shares a name and spelling
3617 * location with its underlying tag type, as is the case with the NS_ENUM macro.
3618 *
3619 * \returns non-zero if transparent and zero otherwise.
3620 */
3621CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_Type_isTransparentTagTypedef(CXType T);
3622
3623/**
Argyrios Kyrtzidise822f582013-04-11 01:20:11 +00003624 * \brief List the possible error codes for \c clang_Type_getSizeOf,
3625 * \c clang_Type_getAlignOf, \c clang_Type_getOffsetOf and
3626 * \c clang_Cursor_getOffsetOf.
3627 *
3628 * A value of this enumeration type can be returned if the target type is not
3629 * a valid argument to sizeof, alignof or offsetof.
3630 */
3631enum CXTypeLayoutError {
3632 /**
3633 * \brief Type is of kind CXType_Invalid.
3634 */
3635 CXTypeLayoutError_Invalid = -1,
3636 /**
3637 * \brief The type is an incomplete Type.
3638 */
3639 CXTypeLayoutError_Incomplete = -2,
3640 /**
3641 * \brief The type is a dependent Type.
3642 */
3643 CXTypeLayoutError_Dependent = -3,
3644 /**
3645 * \brief The type is not a constant size type.
3646 */
3647 CXTypeLayoutError_NotConstantSize = -4,
3648 /**
3649 * \brief The Field name is not valid for this record.
3650 */
3651 CXTypeLayoutError_InvalidFieldName = -5
3652};
3653
3654/**
3655 * \brief Return the alignment of a type in bytes as per C++[expr.alignof]
3656 * standard.
3657 *
3658 * If the type declaration is invalid, CXTypeLayoutError_Invalid is returned.
3659 * If the type declaration is an incomplete type, CXTypeLayoutError_Incomplete
3660 * is returned.
3661 * If the type declaration is a dependent type, CXTypeLayoutError_Dependent is
3662 * returned.
3663 * If the type declaration is not a constant size type,
3664 * CXTypeLayoutError_NotConstantSize is returned.
3665 */
3666CINDEX_LINKAGE long long clang_Type_getAlignOf(CXType T);
3667
3668/**
Argyrios Kyrtzidis7a4253b2013-10-03 16:19:23 +00003669 * \brief Return the class type of an member pointer type.
3670 *
3671 * If a non-member-pointer type is passed in, an invalid type is returned.
3672 */
3673CINDEX_LINKAGE CXType clang_Type_getClassType(CXType T);
3674
3675/**
Argyrios Kyrtzidise822f582013-04-11 01:20:11 +00003676 * \brief Return the size of a type in bytes as per C++[expr.sizeof] standard.
3677 *
3678 * If the type declaration is invalid, CXTypeLayoutError_Invalid is returned.
3679 * If the type declaration is an incomplete type, CXTypeLayoutError_Incomplete
3680 * is returned.
3681 * If the type declaration is a dependent type, CXTypeLayoutError_Dependent is
3682 * returned.
3683 */
3684CINDEX_LINKAGE long long clang_Type_getSizeOf(CXType T);
3685
3686/**
3687 * \brief Return the offset of a field named S in a record of type T in bits
3688 * as it would be returned by __offsetof__ as per C++11[18.2p4]
3689 *
3690 * If the cursor is not a record field declaration, CXTypeLayoutError_Invalid
3691 * is returned.
3692 * If the field's type declaration is an incomplete type,
3693 * CXTypeLayoutError_Incomplete is returned.
3694 * If the field's type declaration is a dependent type,
3695 * CXTypeLayoutError_Dependent is returned.
3696 * If the field's name S is not found,
3697 * CXTypeLayoutError_InvalidFieldName is returned.
3698 */
3699CINDEX_LINKAGE long long clang_Type_getOffsetOf(CXType T, const char *S);
3700
Argyrios Kyrtzidis2bff5162015-04-13 16:55:04 +00003701/**
3702 * \brief Return the offset of the field represented by the Cursor.
3703 *
3704 * If the cursor is not a field declaration, -1 is returned.
3705 * If the cursor semantic parent is not a record field declaration,
3706 * CXTypeLayoutError_Invalid is returned.
3707 * If the field's type declaration is an incomplete type,
3708 * CXTypeLayoutError_Incomplete is returned.
3709 * If the field's type declaration is a dependent type,
3710 * CXTypeLayoutError_Dependent is returned.
3711 * If the field's name S is not found,
3712 * CXTypeLayoutError_InvalidFieldName is returned.
3713 */
3714CINDEX_LINKAGE long long clang_Cursor_getOffsetOfField(CXCursor C);
3715
3716/**
3717 * \brief Determine whether the given cursor represents an anonymous record
3718 * declaration.
3719 */
3720CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_Cursor_isAnonymous(CXCursor C);
3721
Argyrios Kyrtzidisadff3ae2013-10-11 19:58:38 +00003722enum CXRefQualifierKind {
3723 /** \brief No ref-qualifier was provided. */
3724 CXRefQualifier_None = 0,
3725 /** \brief An lvalue ref-qualifier was provided (\c &). */
3726 CXRefQualifier_LValue,
3727 /** \brief An rvalue ref-qualifier was provided (\c &&). */
3728 CXRefQualifier_RValue
3729};
3730
3731/**
Argyrios Kyrtzidis35f5aab2016-11-15 20:51:46 +00003732 * \brief Returns the number of template arguments for given template
3733 * specialization, or -1 if type \c T is not a template specialization.
Dmitri Gribenko6ede6ab2014-02-27 16:05:05 +00003734 */
3735CINDEX_LINKAGE int clang_Type_getNumTemplateArguments(CXType T);
3736
3737/**
3738 * \brief Returns the type template argument of a template class specialization
3739 * at given index.
3740 *
3741 * This function only returns template type arguments and does not handle
3742 * template template arguments or variadic packs.
3743 */
3744CINDEX_LINKAGE CXType clang_Type_getTemplateArgumentAsType(CXType T, unsigned i);
3745
3746/**
Argyrios Kyrtzidisadff3ae2013-10-11 19:58:38 +00003747 * \brief Retrieve the ref-qualifier kind of a function or method.
3748 *
3749 * The ref-qualifier is returned for C++ functions or methods. For other types
3750 * or non-C++ declarations, CXRefQualifier_None is returned.
3751 */
3752CINDEX_LINKAGE enum CXRefQualifierKind clang_Type_getCXXRefQualifier(CXType T);
3753
Argyrios Kyrtzidise822f582013-04-11 01:20:11 +00003754/**
3755 * \brief Returns non-zero if the cursor specifies a Record member that is a
3756 * bitfield.
3757 */
3758CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_Cursor_isBitField(CXCursor C);
3759
3760/**
Ted Kremenekae9e2212010-08-27 21:34:58 +00003761 * \brief Returns 1 if the base class specified by the cursor with kind
3762 * CX_CXXBaseSpecifier is virtual.
3763 */
3764CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_isVirtualBase(CXCursor);
3765
3766/**
3767 * \brief Represents the C++ access control level to a base class for a
3768 * cursor with kind CX_CXXBaseSpecifier.
3769 */
3770enum CX_CXXAccessSpecifier {
3771 CX_CXXInvalidAccessSpecifier,
3772 CX_CXXPublic,
3773 CX_CXXProtected,
3774 CX_CXXPrivate
3775};
3776
3777/**
Argyrios Kyrtzidis1ab09cc2013-04-11 17:02:10 +00003778 * \brief Returns the access control level for the referenced object.
Argyrios Kyrtzidisf6464082013-04-11 17:31:13 +00003779 *
Argyrios Kyrtzidis1ab09cc2013-04-11 17:02:10 +00003780 * If the cursor refers to a C++ declaration, its access control level within its
3781 * parent scope is returned. Otherwise, if the cursor refers to a base specifier or
3782 * access specifier, the specifier itself is returned.
Ted Kremenekae9e2212010-08-27 21:34:58 +00003783 */
3784CINDEX_LINKAGE enum CX_CXXAccessSpecifier clang_getCXXAccessSpecifier(CXCursor);
3785
3786/**
Argyrios Kyrtzidis4e0854f2014-10-15 17:05:31 +00003787 * \brief Represents the storage classes as declared in the source. CX_SC_Invalid
Chad Rosierdb1cc7f2014-12-05 15:50:44 +00003788 * was added for the case that the passed cursor in not a declaration.
Argyrios Kyrtzidis4e0854f2014-10-15 17:05:31 +00003789 */
3790enum CX_StorageClass {
3791 CX_SC_Invalid,
3792 CX_SC_None,
3793 CX_SC_Extern,
3794 CX_SC_Static,
3795 CX_SC_PrivateExtern,
3796 CX_SC_OpenCLWorkGroupLocal,
3797 CX_SC_Auto,
3798 CX_SC_Register
3799};
3800
3801/**
3802 * \brief Returns the storage class for a function or variable declaration.
3803 *
3804 * If the passed in Cursor is not a function or variable declaration,
3805 * CX_SC_Invalid is returned else the storage class.
3806 */
3807CINDEX_LINKAGE enum CX_StorageClass clang_Cursor_getStorageClass(CXCursor);
3808
3809/**
Douglas Gregor16a2bdd2010-09-13 22:52:57 +00003810 * \brief Determine the number of overloaded declarations referenced by a
3811 * \c CXCursor_OverloadedDeclRef cursor.
3812 *
3813 * \param cursor The cursor whose overloaded declarations are being queried.
3814 *
3815 * \returns The number of overloaded declarations referenced by \c cursor. If it
3816 * is not a \c CXCursor_OverloadedDeclRef cursor, returns 0.
3817 */
3818CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_getNumOverloadedDecls(CXCursor cursor);
3819
3820/**
3821 * \brief Retrieve a cursor for one of the overloaded declarations referenced
3822 * by a \c CXCursor_OverloadedDeclRef cursor.
3823 *
3824 * \param cursor The cursor whose overloaded declarations are being queried.
3825 *
3826 * \param index The zero-based index into the set of overloaded declarations in
3827 * the cursor.
3828 *
3829 * \returns A cursor representing the declaration referenced by the given
3830 * \c cursor at the specified \c index. If the cursor does not have an
3831 * associated set of overloaded declarations, or if the index is out of bounds,
3832 * returns \c clang_getNullCursor();
3833 */
3834CINDEX_LINKAGE CXCursor clang_getOverloadedDecl(CXCursor cursor,
3835 unsigned index);
3836
3837/**
Ted Kremenek6bca9842010-05-14 21:29:26 +00003838 * @}
3839 */
Ted Kremeneka5940822010-08-26 01:42:22 +00003840
3841/**
Ted Kremenek2c2c5f32010-08-27 21:34:51 +00003842 * \defgroup CINDEX_ATTRIBUTES Information for attributes
Ted Kremeneka5940822010-08-26 01:42:22 +00003843 *
3844 * @{
3845 */
3846
Ted Kremeneka5940822010-08-26 01:42:22 +00003847/**
3848 * \brief For cursors representing an iboutletcollection attribute,
3849 * this function returns the collection element type.
3850 *
3851 */
3852CINDEX_LINKAGE CXType clang_getIBOutletCollectionType(CXCursor);
3853
3854/**
3855 * @}
3856 */
Ted Kremenek6bca9842010-05-14 21:29:26 +00003857
3858/**
Douglas Gregor6007cf22010-01-22 22:29:16 +00003859 * \defgroup CINDEX_CURSOR_TRAVERSAL Traversing the AST with cursors
3860 *
3861 * These routines provide the ability to traverse the abstract syntax tree
3862 * using cursors.
3863 *
3864 * @{
3865 */
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00003866
Douglas Gregor6007cf22010-01-22 22:29:16 +00003867/**
3868 * \brief Describes how the traversal of the children of a particular
3869 * cursor should proceed after visiting a particular child cursor.
3870 *
3871 * A value of this enumeration type should be returned by each
3872 * \c CXCursorVisitor to indicate how clang_visitChildren() proceed.
3873 */
3874enum CXChildVisitResult {
3875 /**
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00003876 * \brief Terminates the cursor traversal.
Douglas Gregor6007cf22010-01-22 22:29:16 +00003877 */
3878 CXChildVisit_Break,
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00003879 /**
Douglas Gregor6007cf22010-01-22 22:29:16 +00003880 * \brief Continues the cursor traversal with the next sibling of
3881 * the cursor just visited, without visiting its children.
3882 */
3883 CXChildVisit_Continue,
3884 /**
3885 * \brief Recursively traverse the children of this cursor, using
3886 * the same visitor and client data.
3887 */
3888 CXChildVisit_Recurse
3889};
3890
3891/**
3892 * \brief Visitor invoked for each cursor found by a traversal.
3893 *
3894 * This visitor function will be invoked for each cursor found by
3895 * clang_visitCursorChildren(). Its first argument is the cursor being
3896 * visited, its second argument is the parent visitor for that cursor,
3897 * and its third argument is the client data provided to
3898 * clang_visitCursorChildren().
3899 *
3900 * The visitor should return one of the \c CXChildVisitResult values
3901 * to direct clang_visitCursorChildren().
3902 */
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00003903typedef enum CXChildVisitResult (*CXCursorVisitor)(CXCursor cursor,
3904 CXCursor parent,
Douglas Gregor6007cf22010-01-22 22:29:16 +00003905 CXClientData client_data);
3906
3907/**
3908 * \brief Visit the children of a particular cursor.
3909 *
3910 * This function visits all the direct children of the given cursor,
3911 * invoking the given \p visitor function with the cursors of each
3912 * visited child. The traversal may be recursive, if the visitor returns
3913 * \c CXChildVisit_Recurse. The traversal may also be ended prematurely, if
3914 * the visitor returns \c CXChildVisit_Break.
3915 *
Douglas Gregor6007cf22010-01-22 22:29:16 +00003916 * \param parent the cursor whose child may be visited. All kinds of
Daniel Dunbarb9999fd2010-01-24 04:10:31 +00003917 * cursors can be visited, including invalid cursors (which, by
Douglas Gregor6007cf22010-01-22 22:29:16 +00003918 * definition, have no children).
3919 *
3920 * \param visitor the visitor function that will be invoked for each
3921 * child of \p parent.
3922 *
3923 * \param client_data pointer data supplied by the client, which will
3924 * be passed to the visitor each time it is invoked.
3925 *
3926 * \returns a non-zero value if the traversal was terminated
3927 * prematurely by the visitor returning \c CXChildVisit_Break.
3928 */
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00003929CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_visitChildren(CXCursor parent,
Douglas Gregor6007cf22010-01-22 22:29:16 +00003930 CXCursorVisitor visitor,
3931 CXClientData client_data);
David Chisnallb2aa0ef2010-11-03 14:12:26 +00003932#ifdef __has_feature
3933# if __has_feature(blocks)
3934/**
3935 * \brief Visitor invoked for each cursor found by a traversal.
3936 *
3937 * This visitor block will be invoked for each cursor found by
3938 * clang_visitChildrenWithBlock(). Its first argument is the cursor being
3939 * visited, its second argument is the parent visitor for that cursor.
3940 *
3941 * The visitor should return one of the \c CXChildVisitResult values
3942 * to direct clang_visitChildrenWithBlock().
3943 */
3944typedef enum CXChildVisitResult
3945 (^CXCursorVisitorBlock)(CXCursor cursor, CXCursor parent);
3946
3947/**
3948 * Visits the children of a cursor using the specified block. Behaves
3949 * identically to clang_visitChildren() in all other respects.
3950 */
Argyrios Kyrtzidisa0a35d72016-02-07 18:21:28 +00003951CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_visitChildrenWithBlock(CXCursor parent,
3952 CXCursorVisitorBlock block);
David Chisnallb2aa0ef2010-11-03 14:12:26 +00003953# endif
3954#endif
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00003955
Douglas Gregor6007cf22010-01-22 22:29:16 +00003956/**
3957 * @}
3958 */
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00003959
Douglas Gregor6007cf22010-01-22 22:29:16 +00003960/**
3961 * \defgroup CINDEX_CURSOR_XREF Cross-referencing in the AST
3962 *
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00003963 * These routines provide the ability to determine references within and
Douglas Gregor6007cf22010-01-22 22:29:16 +00003964 * across translation units, by providing the names of the entities referenced
3965 * by cursors, follow reference cursors to the declarations they reference,
3966 * and associate declarations with their definitions.
3967 *
3968 * @{
3969 */
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00003970
Douglas Gregor6007cf22010-01-22 22:29:16 +00003971/**
3972 * \brief Retrieve a Unified Symbol Resolution (USR) for the entity referenced
3973 * by the given cursor.
3974 *
3975 * A Unified Symbol Resolution (USR) is a string that identifies a particular
3976 * entity (function, class, variable, etc.) within a program. USRs can be
3977 * compared across translation units to determine, e.g., when references in
3978 * one translation refer to an entity defined in another translation unit.
3979 */
3980CINDEX_LINKAGE CXString clang_getCursorUSR(CXCursor);
3981
3982/**
Ted Kremenekd071c602010-03-13 02:50:34 +00003983 * \brief Construct a USR for a specified Objective-C class.
3984 */
3985CINDEX_LINKAGE CXString clang_constructUSR_ObjCClass(const char *class_name);
3986
3987/**
3988 * \brief Construct a USR for a specified Objective-C category.
3989 */
3990CINDEX_LINKAGE CXString
Ted Kremenekbc1a67b2010-03-15 17:38:58 +00003991 clang_constructUSR_ObjCCategory(const char *class_name,
Ted Kremenekd071c602010-03-13 02:50:34 +00003992 const char *category_name);
3993
3994/**
3995 * \brief Construct a USR for a specified Objective-C protocol.
3996 */
3997CINDEX_LINKAGE CXString
3998 clang_constructUSR_ObjCProtocol(const char *protocol_name);
3999
Ted Kremenekd071c602010-03-13 02:50:34 +00004000/**
4001 * \brief Construct a USR for a specified Objective-C instance variable and
4002 * the USR for its containing class.
4003 */
4004CINDEX_LINKAGE CXString clang_constructUSR_ObjCIvar(const char *name,
4005 CXString classUSR);
4006
4007/**
4008 * \brief Construct a USR for a specified Objective-C method and
4009 * the USR for its containing class.
4010 */
4011CINDEX_LINKAGE CXString clang_constructUSR_ObjCMethod(const char *name,
4012 unsigned isInstanceMethod,
4013 CXString classUSR);
4014
4015/**
4016 * \brief Construct a USR for a specified Objective-C property and the USR
4017 * for its containing class.
4018 */
4019CINDEX_LINKAGE CXString clang_constructUSR_ObjCProperty(const char *property,
4020 CXString classUSR);
4021
4022/**
Douglas Gregor6007cf22010-01-22 22:29:16 +00004023 * \brief Retrieve a name for the entity referenced by this cursor.
4024 */
4025CINDEX_LINKAGE CXString clang_getCursorSpelling(CXCursor);
4026
Douglas Gregor97c75712010-10-02 22:49:11 +00004027/**
Argyrios Kyrtzidis191a6a82012-03-30 20:58:35 +00004028 * \brief Retrieve a range for a piece that forms the cursors spelling name.
4029 * Most of the times there is only one range for the complete spelling but for
Nico Weber7deebef2014-04-24 03:17:47 +00004030 * Objective-C methods and Objective-C message expressions, there are multiple
4031 * pieces for each selector identifier.
Argyrios Kyrtzidis191a6a82012-03-30 20:58:35 +00004032 *
4033 * \param pieceIndex the index of the spelling name piece. If this is greater
4034 * than the actual number of pieces, it will return a NULL (invalid) range.
4035 *
4036 * \param options Reserved.
4037 */
4038CINDEX_LINKAGE CXSourceRange clang_Cursor_getSpellingNameRange(CXCursor,
4039 unsigned pieceIndex,
4040 unsigned options);
4041
4042/**
Douglas Gregor97c75712010-10-02 22:49:11 +00004043 * \brief Retrieve the display name for the entity referenced by this cursor.
4044 *
4045 * The display name contains extra information that helps identify the cursor,
4046 * such as the parameters of a function or template or the arguments of a
4047 * class template specialization.
4048 */
4049CINDEX_LINKAGE CXString clang_getCursorDisplayName(CXCursor);
4050
Douglas Gregorad27e8b2010-01-19 01:20:04 +00004051/** \brief For a cursor that is a reference, retrieve a cursor representing the
4052 * entity that it references.
4053 *
4054 * Reference cursors refer to other entities in the AST. For example, an
4055 * Objective-C superclass reference cursor refers to an Objective-C class.
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00004056 * This function produces the cursor for the Objective-C class from the
Douglas Gregorad27e8b2010-01-19 01:20:04 +00004057 * cursor for the superclass reference. If the input cursor is a declaration or
4058 * definition, it returns that declaration or definition unchanged.
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00004059 * Otherwise, returns the NULL cursor.
Douglas Gregorad27e8b2010-01-19 01:20:04 +00004060 */
4061CINDEX_LINKAGE CXCursor clang_getCursorReferenced(CXCursor);
Douglas Gregor6b8232f2010-01-19 19:34:47 +00004062
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00004063/**
Douglas Gregor6b8232f2010-01-19 19:34:47 +00004064 * \brief For a cursor that is either a reference to or a declaration
4065 * of some entity, retrieve a cursor that describes the definition of
4066 * that entity.
4067 *
4068 * Some entities can be declared multiple times within a translation
4069 * unit, but only one of those declarations can also be a
4070 * definition. For example, given:
4071 *
4072 * \code
4073 * int f(int, int);
4074 * int g(int x, int y) { return f(x, y); }
4075 * int f(int a, int b) { return a + b; }
4076 * int f(int, int);
4077 * \endcode
4078 *
4079 * there are three declarations of the function "f", but only the
4080 * second one is a definition. The clang_getCursorDefinition()
4081 * function will take any cursor pointing to a declaration of "f"
4082 * (the first or fourth lines of the example) or a cursor referenced
4083 * that uses "f" (the call to "f' inside "g") and will return a
4084 * declaration cursor pointing to the definition (the second "f"
4085 * declaration).
4086 *
4087 * If given a cursor for which there is no corresponding definition,
4088 * e.g., because there is no definition of that entity within this
4089 * translation unit, returns a NULL cursor.
4090 */
4091CINDEX_LINKAGE CXCursor clang_getCursorDefinition(CXCursor);
4092
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00004093/**
Douglas Gregor6b8232f2010-01-19 19:34:47 +00004094 * \brief Determine whether the declaration pointed to by this cursor
4095 * is also a definition of that entity.
4096 */
4097CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_isCursorDefinition(CXCursor);
4098
Douglas Gregor6007cf22010-01-22 22:29:16 +00004099/**
Douglas Gregorfec4dc92010-11-19 23:44:15 +00004100 * \brief Retrieve the canonical cursor corresponding to the given cursor.
4101 *
4102 * In the C family of languages, many kinds of entities can be declared several
4103 * times within a single translation unit. For example, a structure type can
4104 * be forward-declared (possibly multiple times) and later defined:
4105 *
4106 * \code
4107 * struct X;
4108 * struct X;
4109 * struct X {
4110 * int member;
4111 * };
4112 * \endcode
4113 *
4114 * The declarations and the definition of \c X are represented by three
4115 * different cursors, all of which are declarations of the same underlying
4116 * entity. One of these cursor is considered the "canonical" cursor, which
4117 * is effectively the representative for the underlying entity. One can
4118 * determine if two cursors are declarations of the same underlying entity by
4119 * comparing their canonical cursors.
4120 *
4121 * \returns The canonical cursor for the entity referred to by the given cursor.
4122 */
4123CINDEX_LINKAGE CXCursor clang_getCanonicalCursor(CXCursor);
4124
Argyrios Kyrtzidis210f29f2012-03-30 22:15:48 +00004125/**
Nico Weber7deebef2014-04-24 03:17:47 +00004126 * \brief If the cursor points to a selector identifier in an Objective-C
4127 * method or message expression, this returns the selector index.
Argyrios Kyrtzidis210f29f2012-03-30 22:15:48 +00004128 *
James Dennett574cb4c2012-06-15 05:41:51 +00004129 * After getting a cursor with #clang_getCursor, this can be called to
Argyrios Kyrtzidis210f29f2012-03-30 22:15:48 +00004130 * determine if the location points to a selector identifier.
4131 *
Nico Weber7deebef2014-04-24 03:17:47 +00004132 * \returns The selector index if the cursor is an Objective-C method or message
Argyrios Kyrtzidis210f29f2012-03-30 22:15:48 +00004133 * expression and the cursor is pointing to a selector identifier, or -1
4134 * otherwise.
4135 */
4136CINDEX_LINKAGE int clang_Cursor_getObjCSelectorIndex(CXCursor);
4137
Douglas Gregorfec4dc92010-11-19 23:44:15 +00004138/**
Nico Weber7deebef2014-04-24 03:17:47 +00004139 * \brief Given a cursor pointing to a C++ method call or an Objective-C
4140 * message, returns non-zero if the method/message is "dynamic", meaning:
Argyrios Kyrtzidisb6df68212012-07-02 23:54:36 +00004141 *
4142 * For a C++ method: the call is virtual.
Nico Weber7deebef2014-04-24 03:17:47 +00004143 * For an Objective-C message: the receiver is an object instance, not 'super'
4144 * or a specific class.
Argyrios Kyrtzidisb6df68212012-07-02 23:54:36 +00004145 *
4146 * If the method/message is "static" or the cursor does not point to a
4147 * method/message, it will return zero.
4148 */
4149CINDEX_LINKAGE int clang_Cursor_isDynamicCall(CXCursor C);
4150
4151/**
Argyrios Kyrtzidis2a684862017-04-27 17:23:04 +00004152 * \brief Given a cursor pointing to an Objective-C message or property
4153 * reference, or C++ method call, returns the CXType of the receiver.
Argyrios Kyrtzidisb26a24c2012-11-01 02:01:34 +00004154 */
4155CINDEX_LINKAGE CXType clang_Cursor_getReceiverType(CXCursor C);
4156
4157/**
Argyrios Kyrtzidis9adfd8a2013-04-18 22:15:49 +00004158 * \brief Property attributes for a \c CXCursor_ObjCPropertyDecl.
4159 */
4160typedef enum {
4161 CXObjCPropertyAttr_noattr = 0x00,
4162 CXObjCPropertyAttr_readonly = 0x01,
4163 CXObjCPropertyAttr_getter = 0x02,
4164 CXObjCPropertyAttr_assign = 0x04,
4165 CXObjCPropertyAttr_readwrite = 0x08,
4166 CXObjCPropertyAttr_retain = 0x10,
4167 CXObjCPropertyAttr_copy = 0x20,
4168 CXObjCPropertyAttr_nonatomic = 0x40,
4169 CXObjCPropertyAttr_setter = 0x80,
4170 CXObjCPropertyAttr_atomic = 0x100,
4171 CXObjCPropertyAttr_weak = 0x200,
4172 CXObjCPropertyAttr_strong = 0x400,
Manman Ren04fd4d82016-05-31 23:22:04 +00004173 CXObjCPropertyAttr_unsafe_unretained = 0x800,
Manman Ren400e4c32016-06-03 23:11:41 +00004174 CXObjCPropertyAttr_class = 0x1000
Argyrios Kyrtzidis9adfd8a2013-04-18 22:15:49 +00004175} CXObjCPropertyAttrKind;
4176
4177/**
4178 * \brief Given a cursor that represents a property declaration, return the
4179 * associated property attributes. The bits are formed from
4180 * \c CXObjCPropertyAttrKind.
4181 *
4182 * \param reserved Reserved for future use, pass 0.
4183 */
4184CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_Cursor_getObjCPropertyAttributes(CXCursor C,
4185 unsigned reserved);
4186
4187/**
Argyrios Kyrtzidis9d9bc012013-04-18 23:29:12 +00004188 * \brief 'Qualifiers' written next to the return and parameter types in
Nico Weber7deebef2014-04-24 03:17:47 +00004189 * Objective-C method declarations.
Argyrios Kyrtzidis9d9bc012013-04-18 23:29:12 +00004190 */
4191typedef enum {
4192 CXObjCDeclQualifier_None = 0x0,
4193 CXObjCDeclQualifier_In = 0x1,
4194 CXObjCDeclQualifier_Inout = 0x2,
4195 CXObjCDeclQualifier_Out = 0x4,
4196 CXObjCDeclQualifier_Bycopy = 0x8,
4197 CXObjCDeclQualifier_Byref = 0x10,
4198 CXObjCDeclQualifier_Oneway = 0x20
4199} CXObjCDeclQualifierKind;
4200
4201/**
Nico Weber7deebef2014-04-24 03:17:47 +00004202 * \brief Given a cursor that represents an Objective-C method or parameter
4203 * declaration, return the associated Objective-C qualifiers for the return
4204 * type or the parameter respectively. The bits are formed from
4205 * CXObjCDeclQualifierKind.
Argyrios Kyrtzidis9d9bc012013-04-18 23:29:12 +00004206 */
4207CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_Cursor_getObjCDeclQualifiers(CXCursor C);
4208
4209/**
Nico Weber7deebef2014-04-24 03:17:47 +00004210 * \brief Given a cursor that represents an Objective-C method or property
Alex Lorenz6c2898a2017-04-06 14:03:25 +00004211 * declaration, return non-zero if the declaration was affected by "\@optional".
4212 * Returns zero if the cursor is not such a declaration or it is "\@required".
Argyrios Kyrtzidis7b50fc52013-07-05 20:44:37 +00004213 */
4214CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_Cursor_isObjCOptional(CXCursor C);
4215
4216/**
Argyrios Kyrtzidis23814e42013-04-18 23:53:05 +00004217 * \brief Returns non-zero if the given cursor is a variadic function or method.
4218 */
4219CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_Cursor_isVariadic(CXCursor C);
4220
4221/**
Argyrios Kyrtzidis0381cc72017-05-10 15:10:36 +00004222 * \brief Returns non-zero if the given cursor points to a symbol marked with
4223 * external_source_symbol attribute.
4224 *
4225 * \param language If non-NULL, and the attribute is present, will be set to
4226 * the 'language' string from the attribute.
4227 *
4228 * \param definedIn If non-NULL, and the attribute is present, will be set to
4229 * the 'definedIn' string from the attribute.
4230 *
4231 * \param isGenerated If non-NULL, and the attribute is present, will be set to
Argyrios Kyrtzidis8b337c02017-05-10 15:48:16 +00004232 * non-zero if the 'generated_declaration' is set in the attribute.
Argyrios Kyrtzidis0381cc72017-05-10 15:10:36 +00004233 */
4234CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_Cursor_isExternalSymbol(CXCursor C,
4235 CXString *language, CXString *definedIn,
4236 unsigned *isGenerated);
4237
4238/**
Dmitri Gribenkoaab83832012-06-20 00:34:58 +00004239 * \brief Given a cursor that represents a declaration, return the associated
4240 * comment's source range. The range may include multiple consecutive comments
4241 * with whitespace in between.
4242 */
4243CINDEX_LINKAGE CXSourceRange clang_Cursor_getCommentRange(CXCursor C);
4244
4245/**
4246 * \brief Given a cursor that represents a declaration, return the associated
4247 * comment text, including comment markers.
4248 */
4249CINDEX_LINKAGE CXString clang_Cursor_getRawCommentText(CXCursor C);
4250
4251/**
Dmitri Gribenko5e4fe002012-07-20 21:34:34 +00004252 * \brief Given a cursor that represents a documentable entity (e.g.,
4253 * declaration), return the associated \\brief paragraph; otherwise return the
4254 * first paragraph.
Dmitri Gribenko5188c4b2012-06-26 20:39:18 +00004255 */
4256CINDEX_LINKAGE CXString clang_Cursor_getBriefCommentText(CXCursor C);
4257
4258/**
Dmitri Gribenko5e4fe002012-07-20 21:34:34 +00004259 * @}
4260 */
4261
Eli Bendersky44a206f2014-07-31 18:04:56 +00004262/** \defgroup CINDEX_MANGLE Name Mangling API Functions
4263 *
4264 * @{
4265 */
4266
4267/**
4268 * \brief Retrieve the CXString representing the mangled name of the cursor.
4269 */
4270CINDEX_LINKAGE CXString clang_Cursor_getMangling(CXCursor);
4271
4272/**
Saleem Abdulrasool60034432015-11-12 03:57:22 +00004273 * \brief Retrieve the CXStrings representing the mangled symbols of the C++
4274 * constructor or destructor at the cursor.
4275 */
4276CINDEX_LINKAGE CXStringSet *clang_Cursor_getCXXManglings(CXCursor);
4277
4278/**
Eli Bendersky44a206f2014-07-31 18:04:56 +00004279 * @}
4280 */
4281
Dmitri Gribenko5e4fe002012-07-20 21:34:34 +00004282/**
Argyrios Kyrtzidis2b9b5bb2012-10-05 00:22:37 +00004283 * \defgroup CINDEX_MODULE Module introspection
4284 *
4285 * The functions in this group provide access to information about modules.
4286 *
4287 * @{
4288 */
4289
4290typedef void *CXModule;
4291
4292/**
4293 * \brief Given a CXCursor_ModuleImportDecl cursor, return the associated module.
4294 */
4295CINDEX_LINKAGE CXModule clang_Cursor_getModule(CXCursor C);
4296
4297/**
Argyrios Kyrtzidisf6d49c32014-05-14 23:14:37 +00004298 * \brief Given a CXFile header file, return the module that contains it, if one
4299 * exists.
4300 */
4301CINDEX_LINKAGE CXModule clang_getModuleForFile(CXTranslationUnit, CXFile);
4302
4303/**
Argyrios Kyrtzidisba30d922012-10-06 01:18:38 +00004304 * \param Module a module object.
Argyrios Kyrtzidis2b9b5bb2012-10-05 00:22:37 +00004305 *
Argyrios Kyrtzidis12fdb9e2013-04-26 22:47:49 +00004306 * \returns the module file where the provided module object came from.
4307 */
4308CINDEX_LINKAGE CXFile clang_Module_getASTFile(CXModule Module);
4309
4310/**
4311 * \param Module a module object.
4312 *
Argyrios Kyrtzidis2b9b5bb2012-10-05 00:22:37 +00004313 * \returns the parent of a sub-module or NULL if the given module is top-level,
4314 * e.g. for 'std.vector' it will return the 'std' module.
4315 */
Argyrios Kyrtzidisba30d922012-10-06 01:18:38 +00004316CINDEX_LINKAGE CXModule clang_Module_getParent(CXModule Module);
Argyrios Kyrtzidis2b9b5bb2012-10-05 00:22:37 +00004317
4318/**
Argyrios Kyrtzidisba30d922012-10-06 01:18:38 +00004319 * \param Module a module object.
Argyrios Kyrtzidis2b9b5bb2012-10-05 00:22:37 +00004320 *
4321 * \returns the name of the module, e.g. for the 'std.vector' sub-module it
4322 * will return "vector".
4323 */
Argyrios Kyrtzidisba30d922012-10-06 01:18:38 +00004324CINDEX_LINKAGE CXString clang_Module_getName(CXModule Module);
Argyrios Kyrtzidis2b9b5bb2012-10-05 00:22:37 +00004325
4326/**
Argyrios Kyrtzidisba30d922012-10-06 01:18:38 +00004327 * \param Module a module object.
Argyrios Kyrtzidis2b9b5bb2012-10-05 00:22:37 +00004328 *
4329 * \returns the full name of the module, e.g. "std.vector".
4330 */
Argyrios Kyrtzidisba30d922012-10-06 01:18:38 +00004331CINDEX_LINKAGE CXString clang_Module_getFullName(CXModule Module);
Argyrios Kyrtzidis2b9b5bb2012-10-05 00:22:37 +00004332
4333/**
Argyrios Kyrtzidisba30d922012-10-06 01:18:38 +00004334 * \param Module a module object.
Argyrios Kyrtzidis2b9b5bb2012-10-05 00:22:37 +00004335 *
Argyrios Kyrtzidis884337f2014-05-15 04:44:25 +00004336 * \returns non-zero if the module is a system one.
4337 */
4338CINDEX_LINKAGE int clang_Module_isSystem(CXModule Module);
4339
4340/**
4341 * \param Module a module object.
4342 *
Argyrios Kyrtzidis2b9b5bb2012-10-05 00:22:37 +00004343 * \returns the number of top level headers associated with this module.
4344 */
Argyrios Kyrtzidis3c5305c2013-03-13 21:13:43 +00004345CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_Module_getNumTopLevelHeaders(CXTranslationUnit,
4346 CXModule Module);
Argyrios Kyrtzidis2b9b5bb2012-10-05 00:22:37 +00004347
4348/**
Argyrios Kyrtzidisba30d922012-10-06 01:18:38 +00004349 * \param Module a module object.
Argyrios Kyrtzidis2b9b5bb2012-10-05 00:22:37 +00004350 *
4351 * \param Index top level header index (zero-based).
4352 *
4353 * \returns the specified top level header associated with the module.
4354 */
Argyrios Kyrtzidisba30d922012-10-06 01:18:38 +00004355CINDEX_LINKAGE
Argyrios Kyrtzidis3c5305c2013-03-13 21:13:43 +00004356CXFile clang_Module_getTopLevelHeader(CXTranslationUnit,
4357 CXModule Module, unsigned Index);
Argyrios Kyrtzidis2b9b5bb2012-10-05 00:22:37 +00004358
4359/**
4360 * @}
4361 */
4362
4363/**
Ted Kremenek9cfe9e62010-05-17 20:06:56 +00004364 * \defgroup CINDEX_CPP C++ AST introspection
4365 *
4366 * The routines in this group provide access information in the ASTs specific
4367 * to C++ language features.
4368 *
4369 * @{
4370 */
4371
4372/**
Jonathan Coe29565352016-04-27 12:48:25 +00004373 * \brief Determine if a C++ constructor is a converting constructor.
4374 */
4375CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_CXXConstructor_isConvertingConstructor(CXCursor C);
4376
4377/**
4378 * \brief Determine if a C++ constructor is a copy constructor.
4379 */
4380CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_CXXConstructor_isCopyConstructor(CXCursor C);
4381
4382/**
4383 * \brief Determine if a C++ constructor is the default constructor.
4384 */
4385CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_CXXConstructor_isDefaultConstructor(CXCursor C);
4386
4387/**
4388 * \brief Determine if a C++ constructor is a move constructor.
4389 */
4390CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_CXXConstructor_isMoveConstructor(CXCursor C);
4391
4392/**
Saleem Abdulrasool6ea75db2015-10-27 15:50:22 +00004393 * \brief Determine if a C++ field is declared 'mutable'.
4394 */
4395CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_CXXField_isMutable(CXCursor C);
4396
4397/**
Jonathan Coe29565352016-04-27 12:48:25 +00004398 * \brief Determine if a C++ method is declared '= default'.
4399 */
4400CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_CXXMethod_isDefaulted(CXCursor C);
4401
4402/**
Dmitri Gribenko62770be2013-05-17 18:38:35 +00004403 * \brief Determine if a C++ member function or member function template is
4404 * pure virtual.
4405 */
4406CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_CXXMethod_isPureVirtual(CXCursor C);
4407
4408/**
Douglas Gregorf11309e2010-08-31 22:12:17 +00004409 * \brief Determine if a C++ member function or member function template is
4410 * declared 'static'.
Ted Kremenek9cfe9e62010-05-17 20:06:56 +00004411 */
4412CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_CXXMethod_isStatic(CXCursor C);
4413
4414/**
Douglas Gregor9519d922011-05-12 15:17:24 +00004415 * \brief Determine if a C++ member function or member function template is
4416 * explicitly declared 'virtual' or if it overrides a virtual method from
4417 * one of the base classes.
4418 */
4419CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_CXXMethod_isVirtual(CXCursor C);
4420
4421/**
Alex Lorenzff7f42e2017-07-12 11:35:11 +00004422 * \brief Determine if an enum declaration refers to a scoped enum.
4423 */
4424CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_EnumDecl_isScoped(CXCursor C);
4425
4426/**
Dmitri Gribenkoe570ede2014-04-07 14:59:13 +00004427 * \brief Determine if a C++ member function or member function template is
4428 * declared 'const'.
4429 */
4430CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_CXXMethod_isConst(CXCursor C);
4431
4432/**
Douglas Gregorf11309e2010-08-31 22:12:17 +00004433 * \brief Given a cursor that represents a template, determine
4434 * the cursor kind of the specializations would be generated by instantiating
4435 * the template.
4436 *
4437 * This routine can be used to determine what flavor of function template,
4438 * class template, or class template partial specialization is stored in the
4439 * cursor. For example, it can describe whether a class template cursor is
4440 * declared with "struct", "class" or "union".
4441 *
4442 * \param C The cursor to query. This cursor should represent a template
4443 * declaration.
4444 *
4445 * \returns The cursor kind of the specializations that would be generated
4446 * by instantiating the template \p C. If \p C is not a template, returns
4447 * \c CXCursor_NoDeclFound.
4448 */
4449CINDEX_LINKAGE enum CXCursorKind clang_getTemplateCursorKind(CXCursor C);
4450
4451/**
Douglas Gregord3f48bd2010-09-02 00:07:54 +00004452 * \brief Given a cursor that may represent a specialization or instantiation
4453 * of a template, retrieve the cursor that represents the template that it
4454 * specializes or from which it was instantiated.
4455 *
4456 * This routine determines the template involved both for explicit
4457 * specializations of templates and for implicit instantiations of the template,
4458 * both of which are referred to as "specializations". For a class template
4459 * specialization (e.g., \c std::vector<bool>), this routine will return
4460 * either the primary template (\c std::vector) or, if the specialization was
4461 * instantiated from a class template partial specialization, the class template
4462 * partial specialization. For a class template partial specialization and a
4463 * function template specialization (including instantiations), this
4464 * this routine will return the specialized template.
4465 *
4466 * For members of a class template (e.g., member functions, member classes, or
4467 * static data members), returns the specialized or instantiated member.
4468 * Although not strictly "templates" in the C++ language, members of class
4469 * templates have the same notions of specializations and instantiations that
4470 * templates do, so this routine treats them similarly.
4471 *
4472 * \param C A cursor that may be a specialization of a template or a member
4473 * of a template.
4474 *
4475 * \returns If the given cursor is a specialization or instantiation of a
4476 * template or a member thereof, the template or member that it specializes or
4477 * from which it was instantiated. Otherwise, returns a NULL cursor.
4478 */
4479CINDEX_LINKAGE CXCursor clang_getSpecializedCursorTemplate(CXCursor C);
Douglas Gregorc1679ec2011-07-25 17:48:11 +00004480
4481/**
4482 * \brief Given a cursor that references something else, return the source range
4483 * covering that reference.
4484 *
4485 * \param C A cursor pointing to a member reference, a declaration reference, or
4486 * an operator call.
4487 * \param NameFlags A bitset with three independent flags:
4488 * CXNameRange_WantQualifier, CXNameRange_WantTemplateArgs, and
4489 * CXNameRange_WantSinglePiece.
4490 * \param PieceIndex For contiguous names or when passing the flag
4491 * CXNameRange_WantSinglePiece, only one piece with index 0 is
4492 * available. When the CXNameRange_WantSinglePiece flag is not passed for a
Benjamin Kramer474261a2012-06-02 10:20:41 +00004493 * non-contiguous names, this index can be used to retrieve the individual
Douglas Gregorc1679ec2011-07-25 17:48:11 +00004494 * pieces of the name. See also CXNameRange_WantSinglePiece.
4495 *
4496 * \returns The piece of the name pointed to by the given cursor. If there is no
4497 * name, or if the PieceIndex is out-of-range, a null-cursor will be returned.
4498 */
Francois Pichetece689f2011-07-25 22:00:44 +00004499CINDEX_LINKAGE CXSourceRange clang_getCursorReferenceNameRange(CXCursor C,
4500 unsigned NameFlags,
Douglas Gregorc1679ec2011-07-25 17:48:11 +00004501 unsigned PieceIndex);
4502
4503enum CXNameRefFlags {
4504 /**
4505 * \brief Include the nested-name-specifier, e.g. Foo:: in x.Foo::y, in the
4506 * range.
4507 */
4508 CXNameRange_WantQualifier = 0x1,
4509
4510 /**
James Dennett574cb4c2012-06-15 05:41:51 +00004511 * \brief Include the explicit template arguments, e.g. \<int> in x.f<int>,
4512 * in the range.
Douglas Gregorc1679ec2011-07-25 17:48:11 +00004513 */
4514 CXNameRange_WantTemplateArgs = 0x2,
4515
4516 /**
4517 * \brief If the name is non-contiguous, return the full spanning range.
4518 *
4519 * Non-contiguous names occur in Objective-C when a selector with two or more
4520 * parameters is used, or in C++ when using an operator:
4521 * \code
Nico Weber7deebef2014-04-24 03:17:47 +00004522 * [object doSomething:here withValue:there]; // Objective-C
Douglas Gregorc1679ec2011-07-25 17:48:11 +00004523 * return some_vector[1]; // C++
4524 * \endcode
4525 */
4526 CXNameRange_WantSinglePiece = 0x4
4527};
Douglas Gregord3f48bd2010-09-02 00:07:54 +00004528
4529/**
Ted Kremenek9cfe9e62010-05-17 20:06:56 +00004530 * @}
4531 */
4532
4533/**
Douglas Gregor61656112010-01-26 18:31:56 +00004534 * \defgroup CINDEX_LEX Token extraction and manipulation
4535 *
4536 * The routines in this group provide access to the tokens within a
4537 * translation unit, along with a semantic mapping of those tokens to
4538 * their corresponding cursors.
Douglas Gregor27b4fa92010-01-26 17:06:03 +00004539 *
4540 * @{
4541 */
4542
4543/**
4544 * \brief Describes a kind of token.
4545 */
4546typedef enum CXTokenKind {
4547 /**
4548 * \brief A token that contains some kind of punctuation.
4549 */
4550 CXToken_Punctuation,
Ted Kremenekd071c602010-03-13 02:50:34 +00004551
Douglas Gregor27b4fa92010-01-26 17:06:03 +00004552 /**
Douglas Gregor61656112010-01-26 18:31:56 +00004553 * \brief A language keyword.
Douglas Gregor27b4fa92010-01-26 17:06:03 +00004554 */
4555 CXToken_Keyword,
Ted Kremenekd071c602010-03-13 02:50:34 +00004556
Douglas Gregor27b4fa92010-01-26 17:06:03 +00004557 /**
4558 * \brief An identifier (that is not a keyword).
4559 */
4560 CXToken_Identifier,
Ted Kremenekd071c602010-03-13 02:50:34 +00004561
Douglas Gregor27b4fa92010-01-26 17:06:03 +00004562 /**
4563 * \brief A numeric, string, or character literal.
4564 */
4565 CXToken_Literal,
Ted Kremenekd071c602010-03-13 02:50:34 +00004566
Douglas Gregor27b4fa92010-01-26 17:06:03 +00004567 /**
4568 * \brief A comment.
4569 */
4570 CXToken_Comment
4571} CXTokenKind;
4572
4573/**
4574 * \brief Describes a single preprocessing token.
4575 */
4576typedef struct {
4577 unsigned int_data[4];
4578 void *ptr_data;
4579} CXToken;
4580
4581/**
4582 * \brief Determine the kind of the given token.
4583 */
4584CINDEX_LINKAGE CXTokenKind clang_getTokenKind(CXToken);
Ted Kremenekd071c602010-03-13 02:50:34 +00004585
Douglas Gregor27b4fa92010-01-26 17:06:03 +00004586/**
4587 * \brief Determine the spelling of the given token.
4588 *
4589 * The spelling of a token is the textual representation of that token, e.g.,
4590 * the text of an identifier or keyword.
4591 */
4592CINDEX_LINKAGE CXString clang_getTokenSpelling(CXTranslationUnit, CXToken);
Ted Kremenekd071c602010-03-13 02:50:34 +00004593
Douglas Gregor27b4fa92010-01-26 17:06:03 +00004594/**
4595 * \brief Retrieve the source location of the given token.
4596 */
Ted Kremenekd071c602010-03-13 02:50:34 +00004597CINDEX_LINKAGE CXSourceLocation clang_getTokenLocation(CXTranslationUnit,
Douglas Gregor27b4fa92010-01-26 17:06:03 +00004598 CXToken);
Ted Kremenekd071c602010-03-13 02:50:34 +00004599
Douglas Gregor27b4fa92010-01-26 17:06:03 +00004600/**
4601 * \brief Retrieve a source range that covers the given token.
4602 */
4603CINDEX_LINKAGE CXSourceRange clang_getTokenExtent(CXTranslationUnit, CXToken);
4604
4605/**
4606 * \brief Tokenize the source code described by the given range into raw
4607 * lexical tokens.
4608 *
4609 * \param TU the translation unit whose text is being tokenized.
4610 *
4611 * \param Range the source range in which text should be tokenized. All of the
4612 * tokens produced by tokenization will fall within this source range,
4613 *
4614 * \param Tokens this pointer will be set to point to the array of tokens
4615 * that occur within the given source range. The returned pointer must be
4616 * freed with clang_disposeTokens() before the translation unit is destroyed.
4617 *
4618 * \param NumTokens will be set to the number of tokens in the \c *Tokens
4619 * array.
4620 *
4621 */
4622CINDEX_LINKAGE void clang_tokenize(CXTranslationUnit TU, CXSourceRange Range,
4623 CXToken **Tokens, unsigned *NumTokens);
Ted Kremenekd071c602010-03-13 02:50:34 +00004624
Douglas Gregor27b4fa92010-01-26 17:06:03 +00004625/**
4626 * \brief Annotate the given set of tokens by providing cursors for each token
4627 * that can be mapped to a specific entity within the abstract syntax tree.
4628 *
Douglas Gregor61656112010-01-26 18:31:56 +00004629 * This token-annotation routine is equivalent to invoking
4630 * clang_getCursor() for the source locations of each of the
4631 * tokens. The cursors provided are filtered, so that only those
4632 * cursors that have a direct correspondence to the token are
4633 * accepted. For example, given a function call \c f(x),
4634 * clang_getCursor() would provide the following cursors:
4635 *
4636 * * when the cursor is over the 'f', a DeclRefExpr cursor referring to 'f'.
4637 * * when the cursor is over the '(' or the ')', a CallExpr referring to 'f'.
4638 * * when the cursor is over the 'x', a DeclRefExpr cursor referring to 'x'.
4639 *
4640 * Only the first and last of these cursors will occur within the
4641 * annotate, since the tokens "f" and "x' directly refer to a function
4642 * and a variable, respectively, but the parentheses are just a small
4643 * part of the full syntax of the function call expression, which is
4644 * not provided as an annotation.
Douglas Gregor27b4fa92010-01-26 17:06:03 +00004645 *
4646 * \param TU the translation unit that owns the given tokens.
4647 *
4648 * \param Tokens the set of tokens to annotate.
4649 *
4650 * \param NumTokens the number of tokens in \p Tokens.
4651 *
4652 * \param Cursors an array of \p NumTokens cursors, whose contents will be
4653 * replaced with the cursors corresponding to each token.
4654 */
4655CINDEX_LINKAGE void clang_annotateTokens(CXTranslationUnit TU,
4656 CXToken *Tokens, unsigned NumTokens,
4657 CXCursor *Cursors);
Ted Kremenekd071c602010-03-13 02:50:34 +00004658
Douglas Gregor27b4fa92010-01-26 17:06:03 +00004659/**
4660 * \brief Free the given set of tokens.
4661 */
Ted Kremenekd071c602010-03-13 02:50:34 +00004662CINDEX_LINKAGE void clang_disposeTokens(CXTranslationUnit TU,
Douglas Gregor27b4fa92010-01-26 17:06:03 +00004663 CXToken *Tokens, unsigned NumTokens);
Ted Kremenekd071c602010-03-13 02:50:34 +00004664
Douglas Gregor27b4fa92010-01-26 17:06:03 +00004665/**
4666 * @}
4667 */
Ted Kremenekd071c602010-03-13 02:50:34 +00004668
Douglas Gregor27b4fa92010-01-26 17:06:03 +00004669/**
Douglas Gregor6007cf22010-01-22 22:29:16 +00004670 * \defgroup CINDEX_DEBUG Debugging facilities
4671 *
4672 * These routines are used for testing and debugging, only, and should not
4673 * be relied upon.
4674 *
4675 * @{
4676 */
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00004677
Steve Naroff76b8f132009-09-23 17:52:52 +00004678/* for debug/testing */
Ted Kremenek29004672010-02-17 00:41:32 +00004679CINDEX_LINKAGE CXString clang_getCursorKindSpelling(enum CXCursorKind Kind);
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00004680CINDEX_LINKAGE void clang_getDefinitionSpellingAndExtent(CXCursor,
4681 const char **startBuf,
Steve Naroff76b8f132009-09-23 17:52:52 +00004682 const char **endBuf,
4683 unsigned *startLine,
4684 unsigned *startColumn,
4685 unsigned *endLine,
4686 unsigned *endColumn);
Douglas Gregor1e21cc72010-02-18 23:07:20 +00004687CINDEX_LINKAGE void clang_enableStackTraces(void);
Daniel Dunbar23420652010-11-04 01:26:29 +00004688CINDEX_LINKAGE void clang_executeOnThread(void (*fn)(void*), void *user_data,
4689 unsigned stack_size);
4690
Douglas Gregor9eb77012009-11-07 00:00:49 +00004691/**
Douglas Gregor6007cf22010-01-22 22:29:16 +00004692 * @}
4693 */
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00004694
Douglas Gregor6007cf22010-01-22 22:29:16 +00004695/**
4696 * \defgroup CINDEX_CODE_COMPLET Code completion
4697 *
4698 * Code completion involves taking an (incomplete) source file, along with
4699 * knowledge of where the user is actively editing that file, and suggesting
4700 * syntactically- and semantically-valid constructs that the user might want to
4701 * use at that particular point in the source code. These data structures and
4702 * routines provide support for code completion.
4703 *
4704 * @{
4705 */
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00004706
Douglas Gregor6007cf22010-01-22 22:29:16 +00004707/**
Douglas Gregor9eb77012009-11-07 00:00:49 +00004708 * \brief A semantic string that describes a code-completion result.
4709 *
4710 * A semantic string that describes the formatting of a code-completion
4711 * result as a single "template" of text that should be inserted into the
4712 * source buffer when a particular code-completion result is selected.
4713 * Each semantic string is made up of some number of "chunks", each of which
4714 * contains some text along with a description of what that text means, e.g.,
4715 * the name of the entity being referenced, whether the text chunk is part of
4716 * the template, or whether it is a "placeholder" that the user should replace
4717 * with actual code,of a specific kind. See \c CXCompletionChunkKind for a
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00004718 * description of the different kinds of chunks.
Douglas Gregor9eb77012009-11-07 00:00:49 +00004719 */
4720typedef void *CXCompletionString;
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00004721
Douglas Gregor9eb77012009-11-07 00:00:49 +00004722/**
4723 * \brief A single result of code completion.
4724 */
4725typedef struct {
4726 /**
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00004727 * \brief The kind of entity that this completion refers to.
Douglas Gregor9eb77012009-11-07 00:00:49 +00004728 *
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00004729 * The cursor kind will be a macro, keyword, or a declaration (one of the
Douglas Gregor9eb77012009-11-07 00:00:49 +00004730 * *Decl cursor kinds), describing the entity that the completion is
4731 * referring to.
4732 *
4733 * \todo In the future, we would like to provide a full cursor, to allow
4734 * the client to extract additional information from declaration.
4735 */
4736 enum CXCursorKind CursorKind;
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00004737
4738 /**
Douglas Gregor9eb77012009-11-07 00:00:49 +00004739 * \brief The code-completion string that describes how to insert this
4740 * code-completion result into the editing buffer.
4741 */
4742 CXCompletionString CompletionString;
4743} CXCompletionResult;
4744
4745/**
4746 * \brief Describes a single piece of text within a code-completion string.
4747 *
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00004748 * Each "chunk" within a code-completion string (\c CXCompletionString) is
4749 * either a piece of text with a specific "kind" that describes how that text
Douglas Gregor9eb77012009-11-07 00:00:49 +00004750 * should be interpreted by the client or is another completion string.
4751 */
4752enum CXCompletionChunkKind {
4753 /**
4754 * \brief A code-completion string that describes "optional" text that
4755 * could be a part of the template (but is not required).
4756 *
4757 * The Optional chunk is the only kind of chunk that has a code-completion
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00004758 * string for its representation, which is accessible via
Douglas Gregor9eb77012009-11-07 00:00:49 +00004759 * \c clang_getCompletionChunkCompletionString(). The code-completion string
4760 * describes an additional part of the template that is completely optional.
4761 * For example, optional chunks can be used to describe the placeholders for
4762 * arguments that match up with defaulted function parameters, e.g. given:
4763 *
4764 * \code
4765 * void f(int x, float y = 3.14, double z = 2.71828);
4766 * \endcode
4767 *
4768 * The code-completion string for this function would contain:
4769 * - a TypedText chunk for "f".
4770 * - a LeftParen chunk for "(".
4771 * - a Placeholder chunk for "int x"
4772 * - an Optional chunk containing the remaining defaulted arguments, e.g.,
4773 * - a Comma chunk for ","
Daniel Dunbar4053fae2010-02-17 08:07:44 +00004774 * - a Placeholder chunk for "float y"
Douglas Gregor9eb77012009-11-07 00:00:49 +00004775 * - an Optional chunk containing the last defaulted argument:
4776 * - a Comma chunk for ","
4777 * - a Placeholder chunk for "double z"
4778 * - a RightParen chunk for ")"
4779 *
Daniel Dunbar4053fae2010-02-17 08:07:44 +00004780 * There are many ways to handle Optional chunks. Two simple approaches are:
Douglas Gregor9eb77012009-11-07 00:00:49 +00004781 * - Completely ignore optional chunks, in which case the template for the
4782 * function "f" would only include the first parameter ("int x").
4783 * - Fully expand all optional chunks, in which case the template for the
4784 * function "f" would have all of the parameters.
4785 */
4786 CXCompletionChunk_Optional,
4787 /**
4788 * \brief Text that a user would be expected to type to get this
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00004789 * code-completion result.
Douglas Gregor9eb77012009-11-07 00:00:49 +00004790 *
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00004791 * There will be exactly one "typed text" chunk in a semantic string, which
4792 * will typically provide the spelling of a keyword or the name of a
Douglas Gregor9eb77012009-11-07 00:00:49 +00004793 * declaration that could be used at the current code point. Clients are
4794 * expected to filter the code-completion results based on the text in this
4795 * chunk.
4796 */
4797 CXCompletionChunk_TypedText,
4798 /**
4799 * \brief Text that should be inserted as part of a code-completion result.
4800 *
4801 * A "text" chunk represents text that is part of the template to be
4802 * inserted into user code should this particular code-completion result
4803 * be selected.
4804 */
4805 CXCompletionChunk_Text,
4806 /**
4807 * \brief Placeholder text that should be replaced by the user.
4808 *
4809 * A "placeholder" chunk marks a place where the user should insert text
4810 * into the code-completion template. For example, placeholders might mark
4811 * the function parameters for a function declaration, to indicate that the
4812 * user should provide arguments for each of those parameters. The actual
4813 * text in a placeholder is a suggestion for the text to display before
4814 * the user replaces the placeholder with real code.
4815 */
4816 CXCompletionChunk_Placeholder,
4817 /**
4818 * \brief Informative text that should be displayed but never inserted as
4819 * part of the template.
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00004820 *
Douglas Gregor9eb77012009-11-07 00:00:49 +00004821 * An "informative" chunk contains annotations that can be displayed to
4822 * help the user decide whether a particular code-completion result is the
4823 * right option, but which is not part of the actual template to be inserted
4824 * by code completion.
4825 */
4826 CXCompletionChunk_Informative,
4827 /**
4828 * \brief Text that describes the current parameter when code-completion is
4829 * referring to function call, message send, or template specialization.
4830 *
4831 * A "current parameter" chunk occurs when code-completion is providing
4832 * information about a parameter corresponding to the argument at the
4833 * code-completion point. For example, given a function
4834 *
4835 * \code
4836 * int add(int x, int y);
4837 * \endcode
4838 *
4839 * and the source code \c add(, where the code-completion point is after the
4840 * "(", the code-completion string will contain a "current parameter" chunk
4841 * for "int x", indicating that the current argument will initialize that
4842 * parameter. After typing further, to \c add(17, (where the code-completion
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00004843 * point is after the ","), the code-completion string will contain a
Douglas Gregor9eb77012009-11-07 00:00:49 +00004844 * "current paremeter" chunk to "int y".
4845 */
4846 CXCompletionChunk_CurrentParameter,
4847 /**
4848 * \brief A left parenthesis ('('), used to initiate a function call or
4849 * signal the beginning of a function parameter list.
4850 */
4851 CXCompletionChunk_LeftParen,
4852 /**
4853 * \brief A right parenthesis (')'), used to finish a function call or
4854 * signal the end of a function parameter list.
4855 */
4856 CXCompletionChunk_RightParen,
4857 /**
4858 * \brief A left bracket ('[').
4859 */
4860 CXCompletionChunk_LeftBracket,
4861 /**
4862 * \brief A right bracket (']').
4863 */
4864 CXCompletionChunk_RightBracket,
4865 /**
4866 * \brief A left brace ('{').
4867 */
4868 CXCompletionChunk_LeftBrace,
4869 /**
4870 * \brief A right brace ('}').
4871 */
4872 CXCompletionChunk_RightBrace,
4873 /**
4874 * \brief A left angle bracket ('<').
4875 */
4876 CXCompletionChunk_LeftAngle,
4877 /**
4878 * \brief A right angle bracket ('>').
4879 */
4880 CXCompletionChunk_RightAngle,
4881 /**
4882 * \brief A comma separator (',').
4883 */
Douglas Gregorb3fa9192009-12-18 18:53:37 +00004884 CXCompletionChunk_Comma,
4885 /**
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00004886 * \brief Text that specifies the result type of a given result.
Douglas Gregorb3fa9192009-12-18 18:53:37 +00004887 *
4888 * This special kind of informative chunk is not meant to be inserted into
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00004889 * the text buffer. Rather, it is meant to illustrate the type that an
Douglas Gregorb3fa9192009-12-18 18:53:37 +00004890 * expression using the given completion string would have.
4891 */
Douglas Gregor504a6ae2010-01-10 23:08:15 +00004892 CXCompletionChunk_ResultType,
4893 /**
4894 * \brief A colon (':').
4895 */
4896 CXCompletionChunk_Colon,
4897 /**
4898 * \brief A semicolon (';').
4899 */
4900 CXCompletionChunk_SemiColon,
4901 /**
4902 * \brief An '=' sign.
4903 */
4904 CXCompletionChunk_Equal,
4905 /**
4906 * Horizontal space (' ').
4907 */
4908 CXCompletionChunk_HorizontalSpace,
4909 /**
Alex Lorenz6c2898a2017-04-06 14:03:25 +00004910 * Vertical space ('\\n'), after which it is generally a good idea to
Douglas Gregor504a6ae2010-01-10 23:08:15 +00004911 * perform indentation.
4912 */
4913 CXCompletionChunk_VerticalSpace
Douglas Gregor9eb77012009-11-07 00:00:49 +00004914};
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00004915
Douglas Gregor9eb77012009-11-07 00:00:49 +00004916/**
4917 * \brief Determine the kind of a particular chunk within a completion string.
4918 *
4919 * \param completion_string the completion string to query.
4920 *
4921 * \param chunk_number the 0-based index of the chunk in the completion string.
4922 *
4923 * \returns the kind of the chunk at the index \c chunk_number.
4924 */
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00004925CINDEX_LINKAGE enum CXCompletionChunkKind
Douglas Gregor9eb77012009-11-07 00:00:49 +00004926clang_getCompletionChunkKind(CXCompletionString completion_string,
4927 unsigned chunk_number);
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00004928
Douglas Gregor9eb77012009-11-07 00:00:49 +00004929/**
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00004930 * \brief Retrieve the text associated with a particular chunk within a
Douglas Gregor9eb77012009-11-07 00:00:49 +00004931 * completion string.
4932 *
4933 * \param completion_string the completion string to query.
4934 *
4935 * \param chunk_number the 0-based index of the chunk in the completion string.
4936 *
4937 * \returns the text associated with the chunk at index \c chunk_number.
4938 */
Ted Kremenekf602f962010-02-17 01:42:24 +00004939CINDEX_LINKAGE CXString
Douglas Gregor9eb77012009-11-07 00:00:49 +00004940clang_getCompletionChunkText(CXCompletionString completion_string,
4941 unsigned chunk_number);
4942
4943/**
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00004944 * \brief Retrieve the completion string associated with a particular chunk
Douglas Gregor9eb77012009-11-07 00:00:49 +00004945 * within a completion string.
4946 *
4947 * \param completion_string the completion string to query.
4948 *
4949 * \param chunk_number the 0-based index of the chunk in the completion string.
4950 *
4951 * \returns the completion string associated with the chunk at index
Erik Verbruggen98ea7f62011-10-14 15:31:08 +00004952 * \c chunk_number.
Douglas Gregor9eb77012009-11-07 00:00:49 +00004953 */
4954CINDEX_LINKAGE CXCompletionString
4955clang_getCompletionChunkCompletionString(CXCompletionString completion_string,
4956 unsigned chunk_number);
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00004957
Douglas Gregor9eb77012009-11-07 00:00:49 +00004958/**
4959 * \brief Retrieve the number of chunks in the given code-completion string.
4960 */
4961CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned
4962clang_getNumCompletionChunks(CXCompletionString completion_string);
4963
4964/**
Douglas Gregora2db7932010-05-26 22:00:08 +00004965 * \brief Determine the priority of this code completion.
4966 *
4967 * The priority of a code completion indicates how likely it is that this
4968 * particular completion is the completion that the user will select. The
4969 * priority is selected by various internal heuristics.
4970 *
4971 * \param completion_string The completion string to query.
4972 *
4973 * \returns The priority of this completion string. Smaller values indicate
4974 * higher-priority (more likely) completions.
4975 */
4976CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned
4977clang_getCompletionPriority(CXCompletionString completion_string);
4978
4979/**
Douglas Gregorf757a122010-08-23 23:00:57 +00004980 * \brief Determine the availability of the entity that this code-completion
4981 * string refers to.
4982 *
4983 * \param completion_string The completion string to query.
4984 *
4985 * \returns The availability of the completion string.
4986 */
4987CINDEX_LINKAGE enum CXAvailabilityKind
4988clang_getCompletionAvailability(CXCompletionString completion_string);
4989
4990/**
Erik Verbruggen98ea7f62011-10-14 15:31:08 +00004991 * \brief Retrieve the number of annotations associated with the given
4992 * completion string.
4993 *
4994 * \param completion_string the completion string to query.
4995 *
4996 * \returns the number of annotations associated with the given completion
4997 * string.
4998 */
4999CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned
5000clang_getCompletionNumAnnotations(CXCompletionString completion_string);
5001
5002/**
5003 * \brief Retrieve the annotation associated with the given completion string.
5004 *
5005 * \param completion_string the completion string to query.
5006 *
5007 * \param annotation_number the 0-based index of the annotation of the
5008 * completion string.
5009 *
5010 * \returns annotation string associated with the completion at index
5011 * \c annotation_number, or a NULL string if that annotation is not available.
5012 */
5013CINDEX_LINKAGE CXString
5014clang_getCompletionAnnotation(CXCompletionString completion_string,
5015 unsigned annotation_number);
5016
5017/**
Douglas Gregor78254c82012-03-27 23:34:16 +00005018 * \brief Retrieve the parent context of the given completion string.
5019 *
5020 * The parent context of a completion string is the semantic parent of
5021 * the declaration (if any) that the code completion represents. For example,
5022 * a code completion for an Objective-C method would have the method's class
5023 * or protocol as its context.
5024 *
5025 * \param completion_string The code completion string whose parent is
5026 * being queried.
5027 *
Argyrios Kyrtzidis9ae39562012-09-26 16:39:56 +00005028 * \param kind DEPRECATED: always set to CXCursor_NotImplemented if non-NULL.
Douglas Gregor78254c82012-03-27 23:34:16 +00005029 *
James Dennett574cb4c2012-06-15 05:41:51 +00005030 * \returns The name of the completion parent, e.g., "NSObject" if
Douglas Gregor78254c82012-03-27 23:34:16 +00005031 * the completion string represents a method in the NSObject class.
5032 */
5033CINDEX_LINKAGE CXString
5034clang_getCompletionParent(CXCompletionString completion_string,
5035 enum CXCursorKind *kind);
Dmitri Gribenko3292d062012-07-02 17:35:10 +00005036
5037/**
5038 * \brief Retrieve the brief documentation comment attached to the declaration
5039 * that corresponds to the given completion string.
5040 */
5041CINDEX_LINKAGE CXString
5042clang_getCompletionBriefComment(CXCompletionString completion_string);
5043
Douglas Gregor78254c82012-03-27 23:34:16 +00005044/**
Douglas Gregor3f35bb22011-08-04 20:04:59 +00005045 * \brief Retrieve a completion string for an arbitrary declaration or macro
5046 * definition cursor.
5047 *
5048 * \param cursor The cursor to query.
5049 *
5050 * \returns A non-context-sensitive completion string for declaration and macro
5051 * definition cursors, or NULL for other kinds of cursors.
5052 */
5053CINDEX_LINKAGE CXCompletionString
5054clang_getCursorCompletionString(CXCursor cursor);
5055
5056/**
Douglas Gregorf72b6ac2009-12-18 16:20:58 +00005057 * \brief Contains the results of code-completion.
5058 *
5059 * This data structure contains the results of code completion, as
Douglas Gregor6a9580282010-10-11 21:51:20 +00005060 * produced by \c clang_codeCompleteAt(). Its contents must be freed by
Douglas Gregorf72b6ac2009-12-18 16:20:58 +00005061 * \c clang_disposeCodeCompleteResults.
5062 */
5063typedef struct {
5064 /**
5065 * \brief The code-completion results.
5066 */
5067 CXCompletionResult *Results;
5068
5069 /**
5070 * \brief The number of code-completion results stored in the
5071 * \c Results array.
5072 */
5073 unsigned NumResults;
5074} CXCodeCompleteResults;
5075
5076/**
Douglas Gregorb68bc592010-08-05 09:09:23 +00005077 * \brief Flags that can be passed to \c clang_codeCompleteAt() to
5078 * modify its behavior.
5079 *
5080 * The enumerators in this enumeration can be bitwise-OR'd together to
5081 * provide multiple options to \c clang_codeCompleteAt().
5082 */
5083enum CXCodeComplete_Flags {
5084 /**
5085 * \brief Whether to include macros within the set of code
5086 * completions returned.
5087 */
5088 CXCodeComplete_IncludeMacros = 0x01,
5089
5090 /**
5091 * \brief Whether to include code patterns for language constructs
5092 * within the set of code completions, e.g., for loops.
5093 */
Dmitri Gribenko3292d062012-07-02 17:35:10 +00005094 CXCodeComplete_IncludeCodePatterns = 0x02,
5095
5096 /**
5097 * \brief Whether to include brief documentation within the set of code
5098 * completions returned.
5099 */
5100 CXCodeComplete_IncludeBriefComments = 0x04
Douglas Gregorb68bc592010-08-05 09:09:23 +00005101};
5102
5103/**
Douglas Gregor21325842011-07-07 16:03:39 +00005104 * \brief Bits that represent the context under which completion is occurring.
5105 *
5106 * The enumerators in this enumeration may be bitwise-OR'd together if multiple
5107 * contexts are occurring simultaneously.
5108 */
5109enum CXCompletionContext {
5110 /**
5111 * \brief The context for completions is unexposed, as only Clang results
5112 * should be included. (This is equivalent to having no context bits set.)
5113 */
5114 CXCompletionContext_Unexposed = 0,
5115
5116 /**
5117 * \brief Completions for any possible type should be included in the results.
5118 */
5119 CXCompletionContext_AnyType = 1 << 0,
5120
5121 /**
5122 * \brief Completions for any possible value (variables, function calls, etc.)
5123 * should be included in the results.
5124 */
5125 CXCompletionContext_AnyValue = 1 << 1,
5126 /**
5127 * \brief Completions for values that resolve to an Objective-C object should
5128 * be included in the results.
5129 */
5130 CXCompletionContext_ObjCObjectValue = 1 << 2,
5131 /**
5132 * \brief Completions for values that resolve to an Objective-C selector
5133 * should be included in the results.
5134 */
5135 CXCompletionContext_ObjCSelectorValue = 1 << 3,
5136 /**
5137 * \brief Completions for values that resolve to a C++ class type should be
5138 * included in the results.
5139 */
5140 CXCompletionContext_CXXClassTypeValue = 1 << 4,
5141
5142 /**
5143 * \brief Completions for fields of the member being accessed using the dot
5144 * operator should be included in the results.
5145 */
5146 CXCompletionContext_DotMemberAccess = 1 << 5,
5147 /**
5148 * \brief Completions for fields of the member being accessed using the arrow
5149 * operator should be included in the results.
5150 */
5151 CXCompletionContext_ArrowMemberAccess = 1 << 6,
5152 /**
5153 * \brief Completions for properties of the Objective-C object being accessed
5154 * using the dot operator should be included in the results.
5155 */
5156 CXCompletionContext_ObjCPropertyAccess = 1 << 7,
5157
5158 /**
5159 * \brief Completions for enum tags should be included in the results.
5160 */
5161 CXCompletionContext_EnumTag = 1 << 8,
5162 /**
5163 * \brief Completions for union tags should be included in the results.
5164 */
5165 CXCompletionContext_UnionTag = 1 << 9,
5166 /**
5167 * \brief Completions for struct tags should be included in the results.
5168 */
5169 CXCompletionContext_StructTag = 1 << 10,
5170
5171 /**
5172 * \brief Completions for C++ class names should be included in the results.
5173 */
5174 CXCompletionContext_ClassTag = 1 << 11,
5175 /**
5176 * \brief Completions for C++ namespaces and namespace aliases should be
5177 * included in the results.
5178 */
5179 CXCompletionContext_Namespace = 1 << 12,
5180 /**
5181 * \brief Completions for C++ nested name specifiers should be included in
5182 * the results.
5183 */
5184 CXCompletionContext_NestedNameSpecifier = 1 << 13,
5185
5186 /**
5187 * \brief Completions for Objective-C interfaces (classes) should be included
5188 * in the results.
5189 */
5190 CXCompletionContext_ObjCInterface = 1 << 14,
5191 /**
5192 * \brief Completions for Objective-C protocols should be included in
5193 * the results.
5194 */
5195 CXCompletionContext_ObjCProtocol = 1 << 15,
5196 /**
5197 * \brief Completions for Objective-C categories should be included in
5198 * the results.
5199 */
5200 CXCompletionContext_ObjCCategory = 1 << 16,
5201 /**
5202 * \brief Completions for Objective-C instance messages should be included
5203 * in the results.
5204 */
5205 CXCompletionContext_ObjCInstanceMessage = 1 << 17,
5206 /**
5207 * \brief Completions for Objective-C class messages should be included in
5208 * the results.
5209 */
5210 CXCompletionContext_ObjCClassMessage = 1 << 18,
5211 /**
5212 * \brief Completions for Objective-C selector names should be included in
5213 * the results.
5214 */
5215 CXCompletionContext_ObjCSelectorName = 1 << 19,
5216
5217 /**
5218 * \brief Completions for preprocessor macro names should be included in
5219 * the results.
5220 */
5221 CXCompletionContext_MacroName = 1 << 20,
5222
5223 /**
5224 * \brief Natural language completions should be included in the results.
5225 */
5226 CXCompletionContext_NaturalLanguage = 1 << 21,
5227
5228 /**
5229 * \brief The current context is unknown, so set all contexts.
5230 */
5231 CXCompletionContext_Unknown = ((1 << 22) - 1)
5232};
5233
5234/**
Douglas Gregorb68bc592010-08-05 09:09:23 +00005235 * \brief Returns a default set of code-completion options that can be
5236 * passed to\c clang_codeCompleteAt().
5237 */
5238CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_defaultCodeCompleteOptions(void);
5239
5240/**
Douglas Gregor8e984da2010-08-04 16:47:14 +00005241 * \brief Perform code completion at a given location in a translation unit.
5242 *
5243 * This function performs code completion at a particular file, line, and
5244 * column within source code, providing results that suggest potential
5245 * code snippets based on the context of the completion. The basic model
5246 * for code completion is that Clang will parse a complete source file,
5247 * performing syntax checking up to the location where code-completion has
5248 * been requested. At that point, a special code-completion token is passed
5249 * to the parser, which recognizes this token and determines, based on the
5250 * current location in the C/Objective-C/C++ grammar and the state of
5251 * semantic analysis, what completions to provide. These completions are
5252 * returned via a new \c CXCodeCompleteResults structure.
5253 *
5254 * Code completion itself is meant to be triggered by the client when the
5255 * user types punctuation characters or whitespace, at which point the
5256 * code-completion location will coincide with the cursor. For example, if \c p
5257 * is a pointer, code-completion might be triggered after the "-" and then
5258 * after the ">" in \c p->. When the code-completion location is afer the ">",
5259 * the completion results will provide, e.g., the members of the struct that
5260 * "p" points to. The client is responsible for placing the cursor at the
5261 * beginning of the token currently being typed, then filtering the results
5262 * based on the contents of the token. For example, when code-completing for
5263 * the expression \c p->get, the client should provide the location just after
5264 * the ">" (e.g., pointing at the "g") to this code-completion hook. Then, the
5265 * client can filter the results based on the current token text ("get"), only
5266 * showing those results that start with "get". The intent of this interface
5267 * is to separate the relatively high-latency acquisition of code-completion
5268 * results from the filtering of results on a per-character basis, which must
5269 * have a lower latency.
5270 *
5271 * \param TU The translation unit in which code-completion should
5272 * occur. The source files for this translation unit need not be
5273 * completely up-to-date (and the contents of those source files may
5274 * be overridden via \p unsaved_files). Cursors referring into the
5275 * translation unit may be invalidated by this invocation.
5276 *
5277 * \param complete_filename The name of the source file where code
5278 * completion should be performed. This filename may be any file
5279 * included in the translation unit.
5280 *
5281 * \param complete_line The line at which code-completion should occur.
5282 *
5283 * \param complete_column The column at which code-completion should occur.
5284 * Note that the column should point just after the syntactic construct that
5285 * initiated code completion, and not in the middle of a lexical token.
5286 *
Vedant Kumarcbfe7bb2016-03-23 23:51:36 +00005287 * \param unsaved_files the Files that have not yet been saved to disk
Douglas Gregor8e984da2010-08-04 16:47:14 +00005288 * but may be required for parsing or code completion, including the
5289 * contents of those files. The contents and name of these files (as
5290 * specified by CXUnsavedFile) are copied when necessary, so the
5291 * client only needs to guarantee their validity until the call to
5292 * this function returns.
5293 *
5294 * \param num_unsaved_files The number of unsaved file entries in \p
5295 * unsaved_files.
5296 *
Douglas Gregorb68bc592010-08-05 09:09:23 +00005297 * \param options Extra options that control the behavior of code
5298 * completion, expressed as a bitwise OR of the enumerators of the
5299 * CXCodeComplete_Flags enumeration. The
5300 * \c clang_defaultCodeCompleteOptions() function returns a default set
5301 * of code-completion options.
5302 *
Douglas Gregor8e984da2010-08-04 16:47:14 +00005303 * \returns If successful, a new \c CXCodeCompleteResults structure
5304 * containing code-completion results, which should eventually be
5305 * freed with \c clang_disposeCodeCompleteResults(). If code
5306 * completion fails, returns NULL.
5307 */
5308CINDEX_LINKAGE
5309CXCodeCompleteResults *clang_codeCompleteAt(CXTranslationUnit TU,
5310 const char *complete_filename,
5311 unsigned complete_line,
5312 unsigned complete_column,
5313 struct CXUnsavedFile *unsaved_files,
Douglas Gregorb68bc592010-08-05 09:09:23 +00005314 unsigned num_unsaved_files,
5315 unsigned options);
Douglas Gregor8e984da2010-08-04 16:47:14 +00005316
5317/**
Douglas Gregor49f67ce2010-08-26 13:48:20 +00005318 * \brief Sort the code-completion results in case-insensitive alphabetical
5319 * order.
5320 *
5321 * \param Results The set of results to sort.
5322 * \param NumResults The number of results in \p Results.
5323 */
5324CINDEX_LINKAGE
5325void clang_sortCodeCompletionResults(CXCompletionResult *Results,
5326 unsigned NumResults);
5327
5328/**
Douglas Gregorf72b6ac2009-12-18 16:20:58 +00005329 * \brief Free the given set of code-completion results.
5330 */
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00005331CINDEX_LINKAGE
Douglas Gregorf72b6ac2009-12-18 16:20:58 +00005332void clang_disposeCodeCompleteResults(CXCodeCompleteResults *Results);
Douglas Gregorf757a122010-08-23 23:00:57 +00005333
Douglas Gregor52606ff2010-01-20 01:10:47 +00005334/**
Douglas Gregor33cdd812010-02-18 18:08:43 +00005335 * \brief Determine the number of diagnostics produced prior to the
5336 * location where code completion was performed.
5337 */
Ted Kremenekd071c602010-03-13 02:50:34 +00005338CINDEX_LINKAGE
Douglas Gregor33cdd812010-02-18 18:08:43 +00005339unsigned clang_codeCompleteGetNumDiagnostics(CXCodeCompleteResults *Results);
5340
5341/**
5342 * \brief Retrieve a diagnostic associated with the given code completion.
5343 *
James Dennett574cb4c2012-06-15 05:41:51 +00005344 * \param Results the code completion results to query.
Douglas Gregor33cdd812010-02-18 18:08:43 +00005345 * \param Index the zero-based diagnostic number to retrieve.
5346 *
5347 * \returns the requested diagnostic. This diagnostic must be freed
5348 * via a call to \c clang_disposeDiagnostic().
5349 */
Ted Kremenekd071c602010-03-13 02:50:34 +00005350CINDEX_LINKAGE
Douglas Gregor33cdd812010-02-18 18:08:43 +00005351CXDiagnostic clang_codeCompleteGetDiagnostic(CXCodeCompleteResults *Results,
5352 unsigned Index);
5353
5354/**
Nico Weberdd9c19f2014-04-24 03:06:18 +00005355 * \brief Determines what completions are appropriate for the context
Douglas Gregor21325842011-07-07 16:03:39 +00005356 * the given code completion.
5357 *
5358 * \param Results the code completion results to query
5359 *
5360 * \returns the kinds of completions that are appropriate for use
5361 * along with the given code completion results.
5362 */
5363CINDEX_LINKAGE
5364unsigned long long clang_codeCompleteGetContexts(
5365 CXCodeCompleteResults *Results);
Douglas Gregor63745d52011-07-21 01:05:26 +00005366
5367/**
5368 * \brief Returns the cursor kind for the container for the current code
5369 * completion context. The container is only guaranteed to be set for
5370 * contexts where a container exists (i.e. member accesses or Objective-C
5371 * message sends); if there is not a container, this function will return
5372 * CXCursor_InvalidCode.
5373 *
5374 * \param Results the code completion results to query
5375 *
5376 * \param IsIncomplete on return, this value will be false if Clang has complete
5377 * information about the container. If Clang does not have complete
5378 * information, this value will be true.
5379 *
5380 * \returns the container kind, or CXCursor_InvalidCode if there is not a
5381 * container
5382 */
5383CINDEX_LINKAGE
5384enum CXCursorKind clang_codeCompleteGetContainerKind(
5385 CXCodeCompleteResults *Results,
5386 unsigned *IsIncomplete);
5387
5388/**
5389 * \brief Returns the USR for the container for the current code completion
5390 * context. If there is not a container for the current context, this
5391 * function will return the empty string.
5392 *
5393 * \param Results the code completion results to query
5394 *
5395 * \returns the USR for the container
5396 */
5397CINDEX_LINKAGE
5398CXString clang_codeCompleteGetContainerUSR(CXCodeCompleteResults *Results);
NAKAMURA Takumiaa13f942015-12-09 07:52:46 +00005399
Douglas Gregorea777402011-07-26 15:24:30 +00005400/**
5401 * \brief Returns the currently-entered selector for an Objective-C message
5402 * send, formatted like "initWithFoo:bar:". Only guaranteed to return a
5403 * non-empty string for CXCompletionContext_ObjCInstanceMessage and
5404 * CXCompletionContext_ObjCClassMessage.
5405 *
5406 * \param Results the code completion results to query
5407 *
5408 * \returns the selector (or partial selector) that has been entered thus far
5409 * for an Objective-C message send.
5410 */
5411CINDEX_LINKAGE
5412CXString clang_codeCompleteGetObjCSelector(CXCodeCompleteResults *Results);
5413
Douglas Gregor21325842011-07-07 16:03:39 +00005414/**
Douglas Gregor52606ff2010-01-20 01:10:47 +00005415 * @}
5416 */
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00005417
Ted Kremenekc0f3f722010-01-22 22:44:15 +00005418/**
5419 * \defgroup CINDEX_MISC Miscellaneous utility functions
5420 *
5421 * @{
5422 */
Ted Kremenek3e315a22010-01-23 17:51:23 +00005423
5424/**
5425 * \brief Return a version string, suitable for showing to a user, but not
5426 * intended to be parsed (the format is not guaranteed to be stable).
5427 */
NAKAMURA Takumieacd6672013-01-10 02:12:38 +00005428CINDEX_LINKAGE CXString clang_getClangVersion(void);
Ted Kremenekc0f3f722010-01-22 22:44:15 +00005429
Ted Kremenek1ec7b332011-03-18 23:05:39 +00005430/**
5431 * \brief Enable/disable crash recovery.
5432 *
James Dennett574cb4c2012-06-15 05:41:51 +00005433 * \param isEnabled Flag to indicate if crash recovery is enabled. A non-zero
5434 * value enables crash recovery, while 0 disables it.
Ted Kremenek1ec7b332011-03-18 23:05:39 +00005435 */
5436CINDEX_LINKAGE void clang_toggleCrashRecovery(unsigned isEnabled);
5437
Ted Kremenek0b86e3a2010-01-26 19:31:51 +00005438 /**
Ted Kremenekd071c602010-03-13 02:50:34 +00005439 * \brief Visitor invoked for each file in a translation unit
Ted Kremenek0b86e3a2010-01-26 19:31:51 +00005440 * (used with clang_getInclusions()).
5441 *
5442 * This visitor function will be invoked by clang_getInclusions() for each
James Dennett574cb4c2012-06-15 05:41:51 +00005443 * file included (either at the top-level or by \#include directives) within
Ted Kremenek0b86e3a2010-01-26 19:31:51 +00005444 * a translation unit. The first argument is the file being included, and
5445 * the second and third arguments provide the inclusion stack. The
5446 * array is sorted in order of immediate inclusion. For example,
5447 * the first element refers to the location that included 'included_file'.
5448 */
5449typedef void (*CXInclusionVisitor)(CXFile included_file,
5450 CXSourceLocation* inclusion_stack,
5451 unsigned include_len,
5452 CXClientData client_data);
5453
5454/**
5455 * \brief Visit the set of preprocessor inclusions in a translation unit.
5456 * The visitor function is called with the provided data for every included
5457 * file. This does not include headers included by the PCH file (unless one
5458 * is inspecting the inclusions in the PCH file itself).
5459 */
5460CINDEX_LINKAGE void clang_getInclusions(CXTranslationUnit tu,
5461 CXInclusionVisitor visitor,
5462 CXClientData client_data);
5463
Argyrios Kyrtzidis785705b2016-01-16 00:20:02 +00005464typedef enum {
5465 CXEval_Int = 1 ,
5466 CXEval_Float = 2,
5467 CXEval_ObjCStrLiteral = 3,
5468 CXEval_StrLiteral = 4,
5469 CXEval_CFStr = 5,
5470 CXEval_Other = 6,
5471
5472 CXEval_UnExposed = 0
5473
5474} CXEvalResultKind ;
5475
5476/**
5477 * \brief Evaluation result of a cursor
5478 */
5479typedef void * CXEvalResult;
5480
5481/**
5482 * \brief If cursor is a statement declaration tries to evaluate the
5483 * statement and if its variable, tries to evaluate its initializer,
5484 * into its corresponding type.
5485 */
5486CINDEX_LINKAGE CXEvalResult clang_Cursor_Evaluate(CXCursor C);
5487
5488/**
5489 * \brief Returns the kind of the evaluated result.
5490 */
Argyrios Kyrtzidisa851d7e2016-01-16 03:01:20 +00005491CINDEX_LINKAGE CXEvalResultKind clang_EvalResult_getKind(CXEvalResult E);
Argyrios Kyrtzidis785705b2016-01-16 00:20:02 +00005492
5493/**
5494 * \brief Returns the evaluation result as integer if the
5495 * kind is Int.
5496 */
Argyrios Kyrtzidisa851d7e2016-01-16 03:01:20 +00005497CINDEX_LINKAGE int clang_EvalResult_getAsInt(CXEvalResult E);
Argyrios Kyrtzidis785705b2016-01-16 00:20:02 +00005498
5499/**
Argyrios Kyrtzidis5dda1122016-12-01 23:41:27 +00005500 * \brief Returns the evaluation result as a long long integer if the
5501 * kind is Int. This prevents overflows that may happen if the result is
5502 * returned with clang_EvalResult_getAsInt.
5503 */
5504CINDEX_LINKAGE long long clang_EvalResult_getAsLongLong(CXEvalResult E);
5505
5506/**
5507 * \brief Returns a non-zero value if the kind is Int and the evaluation
5508 * result resulted in an unsigned integer.
5509 */
5510CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_EvalResult_isUnsignedInt(CXEvalResult E);
5511
5512/**
5513 * \brief Returns the evaluation result as an unsigned integer if
5514 * the kind is Int and clang_EvalResult_isUnsignedInt is non-zero.
5515 */
5516CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned long long clang_EvalResult_getAsUnsigned(CXEvalResult E);
5517
5518/**
Argyrios Kyrtzidis785705b2016-01-16 00:20:02 +00005519 * \brief Returns the evaluation result as double if the
5520 * kind is double.
5521 */
Argyrios Kyrtzidisa851d7e2016-01-16 03:01:20 +00005522CINDEX_LINKAGE double clang_EvalResult_getAsDouble(CXEvalResult E);
Argyrios Kyrtzidis785705b2016-01-16 00:20:02 +00005523
5524/**
5525 * \brief Returns the evaluation result as a constant string if the
5526 * kind is other than Int or float. User must not free this pointer,
5527 * instead call clang_EvalResult_dispose on the CXEvalResult returned
5528 * by clang_Cursor_Evaluate.
5529 */
Argyrios Kyrtzidisa851d7e2016-01-16 03:01:20 +00005530CINDEX_LINKAGE const char* clang_EvalResult_getAsStr(CXEvalResult E);
Argyrios Kyrtzidis785705b2016-01-16 00:20:02 +00005531
5532/**
5533 * \brief Disposes the created Eval memory.
5534 */
Argyrios Kyrtzidisa851d7e2016-01-16 03:01:20 +00005535CINDEX_LINKAGE void clang_EvalResult_dispose(CXEvalResult E);
Ted Kremenek0b86e3a2010-01-26 19:31:51 +00005536/**
Ted Kremenekc0f3f722010-01-22 22:44:15 +00005537 * @}
5538 */
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00005539
Argyrios Kyrtzidisf89cc692011-07-11 20:15:00 +00005540/** \defgroup CINDEX_REMAPPING Remapping functions
5541 *
5542 * @{
5543 */
5544
5545/**
5546 * \brief A remapping of original source files and their translated files.
5547 */
5548typedef void *CXRemapping;
5549
5550/**
5551 * \brief Retrieve a remapping.
5552 *
5553 * \param path the path that contains metadata about remappings.
5554 *
5555 * \returns the requested remapping. This remapping must be freed
5556 * via a call to \c clang_remap_dispose(). Can return NULL if an error occurred.
5557 */
5558CINDEX_LINKAGE CXRemapping clang_getRemappings(const char *path);
5559
5560/**
Ted Kremenekf7639e12012-03-06 20:06:33 +00005561 * \brief Retrieve a remapping.
5562 *
5563 * \param filePaths pointer to an array of file paths containing remapping info.
5564 *
5565 * \param numFiles number of file paths.
5566 *
5567 * \returns the requested remapping. This remapping must be freed
5568 * via a call to \c clang_remap_dispose(). Can return NULL if an error occurred.
5569 */
5570CINDEX_LINKAGE
5571CXRemapping clang_getRemappingsFromFileList(const char **filePaths,
5572 unsigned numFiles);
5573
5574/**
Argyrios Kyrtzidisf89cc692011-07-11 20:15:00 +00005575 * \brief Determine the number of remappings.
5576 */
5577CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_remap_getNumFiles(CXRemapping);
5578
5579/**
5580 * \brief Get the original and the associated filename from the remapping.
5581 *
5582 * \param original If non-NULL, will be set to the original filename.
5583 *
5584 * \param transformed If non-NULL, will be set to the filename that the original
5585 * is associated with.
5586 */
5587CINDEX_LINKAGE void clang_remap_getFilenames(CXRemapping, unsigned index,
5588 CXString *original, CXString *transformed);
5589
5590/**
5591 * \brief Dispose the remapping.
5592 */
5593CINDEX_LINKAGE void clang_remap_dispose(CXRemapping);
5594
5595/**
5596 * @}
5597 */
5598
Argyrios Kyrtzidiscddafd32011-10-06 07:00:54 +00005599/** \defgroup CINDEX_HIGH Higher level API functions
5600 *
5601 * @{
5602 */
5603
5604enum CXVisitorResult {
5605 CXVisit_Break,
5606 CXVisit_Continue
5607};
5608
Saleem Abdulrasoolec988b72016-05-24 01:23:24 +00005609typedef struct CXCursorAndRangeVisitor {
Argyrios Kyrtzidiscddafd32011-10-06 07:00:54 +00005610 void *context;
5611 enum CXVisitorResult (*visit)(void *context, CXCursor, CXSourceRange);
5612} CXCursorAndRangeVisitor;
5613
Argyrios Kyrtzidis51c33182013-03-08 22:47:41 +00005614typedef enum {
5615 /**
5616 * \brief Function returned successfully.
5617 */
5618 CXResult_Success = 0,
5619 /**
5620 * \brief One of the parameters was invalid for the function.
5621 */
5622 CXResult_Invalid = 1,
5623 /**
5624 * \brief The function was terminated by a callback (e.g. it returned
5625 * CXVisit_Break)
5626 */
5627 CXResult_VisitBreak = 2
5628
5629} CXResult;
5630
Argyrios Kyrtzidiscddafd32011-10-06 07:00:54 +00005631/**
5632 * \brief Find references of a declaration in a specific file.
5633 *
5634 * \param cursor pointing to a declaration or a reference of one.
5635 *
5636 * \param file to search for references.
5637 *
5638 * \param visitor callback that will receive pairs of CXCursor/CXSourceRange for
5639 * each reference found.
5640 * The CXSourceRange will point inside the file; if the reference is inside
5641 * a macro (and not a macro argument) the CXSourceRange will be invalid.
Argyrios Kyrtzidis951f61f2013-03-08 20:42:33 +00005642 *
Argyrios Kyrtzidis51c33182013-03-08 22:47:41 +00005643 * \returns one of the CXResult enumerators.
Argyrios Kyrtzidiscddafd32011-10-06 07:00:54 +00005644 */
Argyrios Kyrtzidis51c33182013-03-08 22:47:41 +00005645CINDEX_LINKAGE CXResult clang_findReferencesInFile(CXCursor cursor, CXFile file,
5646 CXCursorAndRangeVisitor visitor);
Argyrios Kyrtzidiscddafd32011-10-06 07:00:54 +00005647
Argyrios Kyrtzidis503c83a2013-03-08 02:32:34 +00005648/**
5649 * \brief Find #import/#include directives in a specific file.
5650 *
5651 * \param TU translation unit containing the file to query.
5652 *
5653 * \param file to search for #import/#include directives.
5654 *
5655 * \param visitor callback that will receive pairs of CXCursor/CXSourceRange for
5656 * each directive found.
Argyrios Kyrtzidis951f61f2013-03-08 20:42:33 +00005657 *
Argyrios Kyrtzidis51c33182013-03-08 22:47:41 +00005658 * \returns one of the CXResult enumerators.
Argyrios Kyrtzidis503c83a2013-03-08 02:32:34 +00005659 */
Argyrios Kyrtzidis51c33182013-03-08 22:47:41 +00005660CINDEX_LINKAGE CXResult clang_findIncludesInFile(CXTranslationUnit TU,
5661 CXFile file,
5662 CXCursorAndRangeVisitor visitor);
Argyrios Kyrtzidis503c83a2013-03-08 02:32:34 +00005663
Argyrios Kyrtzidiscddafd32011-10-06 07:00:54 +00005664#ifdef __has_feature
5665# if __has_feature(blocks)
5666
5667typedef enum CXVisitorResult
5668 (^CXCursorAndRangeVisitorBlock)(CXCursor, CXSourceRange);
5669
5670CINDEX_LINKAGE
Argyrios Kyrtzidis51c33182013-03-08 22:47:41 +00005671CXResult clang_findReferencesInFileWithBlock(CXCursor, CXFile,
5672 CXCursorAndRangeVisitorBlock);
Argyrios Kyrtzidiscddafd32011-10-06 07:00:54 +00005673
Argyrios Kyrtzidis503c83a2013-03-08 02:32:34 +00005674CINDEX_LINKAGE
Argyrios Kyrtzidis51c33182013-03-08 22:47:41 +00005675CXResult clang_findIncludesInFileWithBlock(CXTranslationUnit, CXFile,
5676 CXCursorAndRangeVisitorBlock);
Argyrios Kyrtzidis503c83a2013-03-08 02:32:34 +00005677
Argyrios Kyrtzidiscddafd32011-10-06 07:00:54 +00005678# endif
5679#endif
5680
Argyrios Kyrtzidis11d61142011-10-27 17:36:12 +00005681/**
5682 * \brief The client's data object that is associated with a CXFile.
5683 */
Argyrios Kyrtzidis7519c5e2011-11-11 00:23:36 +00005684typedef void *CXIdxClientFile;
Argyrios Kyrtzidis11d61142011-10-27 17:36:12 +00005685
5686/**
Argyrios Kyrtzidis4c910b12011-11-22 07:24:51 +00005687 * \brief The client's data object that is associated with a semantic entity.
5688 */
5689typedef void *CXIdxClientEntity;
5690
5691/**
Argyrios Kyrtzidis11d61142011-10-27 17:36:12 +00005692 * \brief The client's data object that is associated with a semantic container
5693 * of entities.
Argyrios Kyrtzidis11d61142011-10-27 17:36:12 +00005694 */
Argyrios Kyrtzidis7519c5e2011-11-11 00:23:36 +00005695typedef void *CXIdxClientContainer;
Argyrios Kyrtzidis11d61142011-10-27 17:36:12 +00005696
5697/**
Argyrios Kyrtzidis11d61142011-10-27 17:36:12 +00005698 * \brief The client's data object that is associated with an AST file (PCH
5699 * or module).
5700 */
Argyrios Kyrtzidis7519c5e2011-11-11 00:23:36 +00005701typedef void *CXIdxClientASTFile;
Argyrios Kyrtzidisdc199a32011-10-17 19:48:19 +00005702
Argyrios Kyrtzidis11d61142011-10-27 17:36:12 +00005703/**
Argyrios Kyrtzidis7519c5e2011-11-11 00:23:36 +00005704 * \brief Source location passed to index callbacks.
Argyrios Kyrtzidis11d61142011-10-27 17:36:12 +00005705 */
Argyrios Kyrtzidisdc199a32011-10-17 19:48:19 +00005706typedef struct {
5707 void *ptr_data[2];
5708 unsigned int_data;
5709} CXIdxLoc;
5710
Argyrios Kyrtzidis11d61142011-10-27 17:36:12 +00005711/**
James Dennett574cb4c2012-06-15 05:41:51 +00005712 * \brief Data for ppIncludedFile callback.
Argyrios Kyrtzidis11d61142011-10-27 17:36:12 +00005713 */
Argyrios Kyrtzidisdc199a32011-10-17 19:48:19 +00005714typedef struct {
Argyrios Kyrtzidis11d61142011-10-27 17:36:12 +00005715 /**
James Dennett574cb4c2012-06-15 05:41:51 +00005716 * \brief Location of '#' in the \#include/\#import directive.
Argyrios Kyrtzidis11d61142011-10-27 17:36:12 +00005717 */
Argyrios Kyrtzidisdc199a32011-10-17 19:48:19 +00005718 CXIdxLoc hashLoc;
Argyrios Kyrtzidis11d61142011-10-27 17:36:12 +00005719 /**
James Dennett574cb4c2012-06-15 05:41:51 +00005720 * \brief Filename as written in the \#include/\#import directive.
Argyrios Kyrtzidis11d61142011-10-27 17:36:12 +00005721 */
Argyrios Kyrtzidisdc199a32011-10-17 19:48:19 +00005722 const char *filename;
Argyrios Kyrtzidis11d61142011-10-27 17:36:12 +00005723 /**
James Dennett574cb4c2012-06-15 05:41:51 +00005724 * \brief The actual file that the \#include/\#import directive resolved to.
Argyrios Kyrtzidis11d61142011-10-27 17:36:12 +00005725 */
Argyrios Kyrtzidis7519c5e2011-11-11 00:23:36 +00005726 CXFile file;
Argyrios Kyrtzidisdc199a32011-10-17 19:48:19 +00005727 int isImport;
5728 int isAngled;
Argyrios Kyrtzidis5e2ec482012-10-18 00:17:05 +00005729 /**
5730 * \brief Non-zero if the directive was automatically turned into a module
5731 * import.
5732 */
5733 int isModuleImport;
Argyrios Kyrtzidisdc199a32011-10-17 19:48:19 +00005734} CXIdxIncludedFileInfo;
5735
Argyrios Kyrtzidis11d61142011-10-27 17:36:12 +00005736/**
James Dennett574cb4c2012-06-15 05:41:51 +00005737 * \brief Data for IndexerCallbacks#importedASTFile.
Argyrios Kyrtzidis11d61142011-10-27 17:36:12 +00005738 */
Argyrios Kyrtzidisdc199a32011-10-17 19:48:19 +00005739typedef struct {
Argyrios Kyrtzidis472eda02012-10-02 16:10:38 +00005740 /**
5741 * \brief Top level AST file containing the imported PCH, module or submodule.
5742 */
Argyrios Kyrtzidisdc199a32011-10-17 19:48:19 +00005743 CXFile file;
Argyrios Kyrtzidis11d61142011-10-27 17:36:12 +00005744 /**
Argyrios Kyrtzidisdc78f3e2012-10-05 00:22:40 +00005745 * \brief The imported module or NULL if the AST file is a PCH.
5746 */
5747 CXModule module;
5748 /**
Argyrios Kyrtzidis472eda02012-10-02 16:10:38 +00005749 * \brief Location where the file is imported. Applicable only for modules.
Argyrios Kyrtzidis11d61142011-10-27 17:36:12 +00005750 */
Argyrios Kyrtzidisdc199a32011-10-17 19:48:19 +00005751 CXIdxLoc loc;
Argyrios Kyrtzidis11d61142011-10-27 17:36:12 +00005752 /**
Argyrios Kyrtzidis472eda02012-10-02 16:10:38 +00005753 * \brief Non-zero if an inclusion directive was automatically turned into
Argyrios Kyrtzidisdc78f3e2012-10-05 00:22:40 +00005754 * a module import. Applicable only for modules.
Argyrios Kyrtzidis472eda02012-10-02 16:10:38 +00005755 */
Argyrios Kyrtzidis184b1442012-10-03 21:05:44 +00005756 int isImplicit;
Argyrios Kyrtzidis472eda02012-10-02 16:10:38 +00005757
Argyrios Kyrtzidisdc199a32011-10-17 19:48:19 +00005758} CXIdxImportedASTFileInfo;
5759
Argyrios Kyrtzidis7519c5e2011-11-11 00:23:36 +00005760typedef enum {
5761 CXIdxEntity_Unexposed = 0,
5762 CXIdxEntity_Typedef = 1,
5763 CXIdxEntity_Function = 2,
5764 CXIdxEntity_Variable = 3,
5765 CXIdxEntity_Field = 4,
5766 CXIdxEntity_EnumConstant = 5,
5767
5768 CXIdxEntity_ObjCClass = 6,
5769 CXIdxEntity_ObjCProtocol = 7,
5770 CXIdxEntity_ObjCCategory = 8,
5771
Argyrios Kyrtzidis86acd722011-11-14 22:39:19 +00005772 CXIdxEntity_ObjCInstanceMethod = 9,
5773 CXIdxEntity_ObjCClassMethod = 10,
5774 CXIdxEntity_ObjCProperty = 11,
5775 CXIdxEntity_ObjCIvar = 12,
Argyrios Kyrtzidis7519c5e2011-11-11 00:23:36 +00005776
Argyrios Kyrtzidis86acd722011-11-14 22:39:19 +00005777 CXIdxEntity_Enum = 13,
5778 CXIdxEntity_Struct = 14,
5779 CXIdxEntity_Union = 15,
Argyrios Kyrtzidis4c910b12011-11-22 07:24:51 +00005780
5781 CXIdxEntity_CXXClass = 16,
5782 CXIdxEntity_CXXNamespace = 17,
5783 CXIdxEntity_CXXNamespaceAlias = 18,
5784 CXIdxEntity_CXXStaticVariable = 19,
5785 CXIdxEntity_CXXStaticMethod = 20,
5786 CXIdxEntity_CXXInstanceMethod = 21,
Joao Matose9a3ed42012-08-31 22:18:20 +00005787 CXIdxEntity_CXXConstructor = 22,
5788 CXIdxEntity_CXXDestructor = 23,
5789 CXIdxEntity_CXXConversionFunction = 24,
5790 CXIdxEntity_CXXTypeAlias = 25,
5791 CXIdxEntity_CXXInterface = 26
5792
5793} CXIdxEntityKind;
5794
Argyrios Kyrtzidis52002882011-12-07 20:44:12 +00005795typedef enum {
5796 CXIdxEntityLang_None = 0,
5797 CXIdxEntityLang_C = 1,
5798 CXIdxEntityLang_ObjC = 2,
Argyrios Kyrtzidisb4b85f22017-04-24 14:52:00 +00005799 CXIdxEntityLang_CXX = 3,
5800 CXIdxEntityLang_Swift = 4
Argyrios Kyrtzidis52002882011-12-07 20:44:12 +00005801} CXIdxEntityLanguage;
5802
Argyrios Kyrtzidis4c910b12011-11-22 07:24:51 +00005803/**
5804 * \brief Extra C++ template information for an entity. This can apply to:
5805 * CXIdxEntity_Function
5806 * CXIdxEntity_CXXClass
5807 * CXIdxEntity_CXXStaticMethod
5808 * CXIdxEntity_CXXInstanceMethod
5809 * CXIdxEntity_CXXConstructor
5810 * CXIdxEntity_CXXConversionFunction
5811 * CXIdxEntity_CXXTypeAlias
5812 */
5813typedef enum {
5814 CXIdxEntity_NonTemplate = 0,
5815 CXIdxEntity_Template = 1,
5816 CXIdxEntity_TemplatePartialSpecialization = 2,
5817 CXIdxEntity_TemplateSpecialization = 3
5818} CXIdxEntityCXXTemplateKind;
5819
Argyrios Kyrtzidiseffdbf52011-11-18 00:26:51 +00005820typedef enum {
5821 CXIdxAttr_Unexposed = 0,
5822 CXIdxAttr_IBAction = 1,
5823 CXIdxAttr_IBOutlet = 2,
5824 CXIdxAttr_IBOutletCollection = 3
5825} CXIdxAttrKind;
5826
5827typedef struct {
5828 CXIdxAttrKind kind;
5829 CXCursor cursor;
5830 CXIdxLoc loc;
5831} CXIdxAttrInfo;
5832
5833typedef struct {
Argyrios Kyrtzidis4d873b72011-12-15 00:05:00 +00005834 CXIdxEntityKind kind;
5835 CXIdxEntityCXXTemplateKind templateKind;
5836 CXIdxEntityLanguage lang;
5837 const char *name;
5838 const char *USR;
5839 CXCursor cursor;
5840 const CXIdxAttrInfo *const *attributes;
5841 unsigned numAttributes;
5842} CXIdxEntityInfo;
5843
5844typedef struct {
5845 CXCursor cursor;
5846} CXIdxContainerInfo;
5847
5848typedef struct {
Argyrios Kyrtzidiseffdbf52011-11-18 00:26:51 +00005849 const CXIdxAttrInfo *attrInfo;
5850 const CXIdxEntityInfo *objcClass;
5851 CXCursor classCursor;
5852 CXIdxLoc classLoc;
5853} CXIdxIBOutletCollectionAttrInfo;
5854
Argyrios Kyrtzidis8b71bc72012-12-06 19:41:16 +00005855typedef enum {
5856 CXIdxDeclFlag_Skipped = 0x1
5857} CXIdxDeclInfoFlags;
5858
Argyrios Kyrtzidisdc199a32011-10-17 19:48:19 +00005859typedef struct {
Argyrios Kyrtzidis3e429e72011-11-12 02:16:30 +00005860 const CXIdxEntityInfo *entityInfo;
Argyrios Kyrtzidisdc199a32011-10-17 19:48:19 +00005861 CXCursor cursor;
5862 CXIdxLoc loc;
Argyrios Kyrtzidis663c8ec2011-12-07 20:44:19 +00005863 const CXIdxContainerInfo *semanticContainer;
5864 /**
James Dennett574cb4c2012-06-15 05:41:51 +00005865 * \brief Generally same as #semanticContainer but can be different in
Argyrios Kyrtzidis663c8ec2011-12-07 20:44:19 +00005866 * cases like out-of-line C++ member functions.
5867 */
5868 const CXIdxContainerInfo *lexicalContainer;
Argyrios Kyrtzidis7519c5e2011-11-11 00:23:36 +00005869 int isRedeclaration;
Argyrios Kyrtzidisdc199a32011-10-17 19:48:19 +00005870 int isDefinition;
Argyrios Kyrtzidis86acd722011-11-14 22:39:19 +00005871 int isContainer;
Argyrios Kyrtzidis4c910b12011-11-22 07:24:51 +00005872 const CXIdxContainerInfo *declAsContainer;
Argyrios Kyrtzidis86acd722011-11-14 22:39:19 +00005873 /**
5874 * \brief Whether the declaration exists in code or was created implicitly
Nico Weber7deebef2014-04-24 03:17:47 +00005875 * by the compiler, e.g. implicit Objective-C methods for properties.
Argyrios Kyrtzidis86acd722011-11-14 22:39:19 +00005876 */
5877 int isImplicit;
Argyrios Kyrtzidiseffdbf52011-11-18 00:26:51 +00005878 const CXIdxAttrInfo *const *attributes;
5879 unsigned numAttributes;
Argyrios Kyrtzidis8b71bc72012-12-06 19:41:16 +00005880
5881 unsigned flags;
5882
Argyrios Kyrtzidis7519c5e2011-11-11 00:23:36 +00005883} CXIdxDeclInfo;
Argyrios Kyrtzidisdc199a32011-10-17 19:48:19 +00005884
Argyrios Kyrtzidis7519c5e2011-11-11 00:23:36 +00005885typedef enum {
5886 CXIdxObjCContainer_ForwardRef = 0,
5887 CXIdxObjCContainer_Interface = 1,
5888 CXIdxObjCContainer_Implementation = 2
5889} CXIdxObjCContainerKind;
Argyrios Kyrtzidisdc199a32011-10-17 19:48:19 +00005890
5891typedef struct {
Argyrios Kyrtzidis3e429e72011-11-12 02:16:30 +00005892 const CXIdxDeclInfo *declInfo;
Argyrios Kyrtzidis7519c5e2011-11-11 00:23:36 +00005893 CXIdxObjCContainerKind kind;
5894} CXIdxObjCContainerDeclInfo;
Argyrios Kyrtzidisdc199a32011-10-17 19:48:19 +00005895
5896typedef struct {
Argyrios Kyrtzidis3e429e72011-11-12 02:16:30 +00005897 const CXIdxEntityInfo *base;
5898 CXCursor cursor;
Argyrios Kyrtzidisdc199a32011-10-17 19:48:19 +00005899 CXIdxLoc loc;
Argyrios Kyrtzidis3e429e72011-11-12 02:16:30 +00005900} CXIdxBaseClassInfo;
Argyrios Kyrtzidisdc199a32011-10-17 19:48:19 +00005901
5902typedef struct {
Argyrios Kyrtzidis3e429e72011-11-12 02:16:30 +00005903 const CXIdxEntityInfo *protocol;
5904 CXCursor cursor;
Argyrios Kyrtzidisdc199a32011-10-17 19:48:19 +00005905 CXIdxLoc loc;
5906} CXIdxObjCProtocolRefInfo;
5907
5908typedef struct {
Argyrios Kyrtzidis3e429e72011-11-12 02:16:30 +00005909 const CXIdxObjCProtocolRefInfo *const *protocols;
Argyrios Kyrtzidisdc199a32011-10-17 19:48:19 +00005910 unsigned numProtocols;
Argyrios Kyrtzidis86acd722011-11-14 22:39:19 +00005911} CXIdxObjCProtocolRefListInfo;
Argyrios Kyrtzidisdc199a32011-10-17 19:48:19 +00005912
5913typedef struct {
Argyrios Kyrtzidis86acd722011-11-14 22:39:19 +00005914 const CXIdxObjCContainerDeclInfo *containerInfo;
5915 const CXIdxBaseClassInfo *superInfo;
5916 const CXIdxObjCProtocolRefListInfo *protocols;
5917} CXIdxObjCInterfaceDeclInfo;
Argyrios Kyrtzidisdc199a32011-10-17 19:48:19 +00005918
Argyrios Kyrtzidis4c910b12011-11-22 07:24:51 +00005919typedef struct {
Argyrios Kyrtzidis9b9f7a92011-12-13 18:47:45 +00005920 const CXIdxObjCContainerDeclInfo *containerInfo;
5921 const CXIdxEntityInfo *objcClass;
5922 CXCursor classCursor;
5923 CXIdxLoc classLoc;
5924 const CXIdxObjCProtocolRefListInfo *protocols;
5925} CXIdxObjCCategoryDeclInfo;
5926
5927typedef struct {
Argyrios Kyrtzidis4c910b12011-11-22 07:24:51 +00005928 const CXIdxDeclInfo *declInfo;
Argyrios Kyrtzidis93db2922012-02-28 17:50:33 +00005929 const CXIdxEntityInfo *getter;
5930 const CXIdxEntityInfo *setter;
5931} CXIdxObjCPropertyDeclInfo;
5932
5933typedef struct {
5934 const CXIdxDeclInfo *declInfo;
Argyrios Kyrtzidis4c910b12011-11-22 07:24:51 +00005935 const CXIdxBaseClassInfo *const *bases;
5936 unsigned numBases;
5937} CXIdxCXXClassDeclInfo;
5938
Argyrios Kyrtzidis11d61142011-10-27 17:36:12 +00005939/**
James Dennett574cb4c2012-06-15 05:41:51 +00005940 * \brief Data for IndexerCallbacks#indexEntityReference.
Argyrios Kyrtzidis11d61142011-10-27 17:36:12 +00005941 */
Argyrios Kyrtzidis0c7735e52011-10-18 15:50:50 +00005942typedef enum {
Argyrios Kyrtzidis11d61142011-10-27 17:36:12 +00005943 /**
5944 * \brief The entity is referenced directly in user's code.
5945 */
Argyrios Kyrtzidis0c7735e52011-10-18 15:50:50 +00005946 CXIdxEntityRef_Direct = 1,
Argyrios Kyrtzidis11d61142011-10-27 17:36:12 +00005947 /**
Nico Weber7deebef2014-04-24 03:17:47 +00005948 * \brief An implicit reference, e.g. a reference of an Objective-C method
5949 * via the dot syntax.
Argyrios Kyrtzidis11d61142011-10-27 17:36:12 +00005950 */
Argyrios Kyrtzidiseffdbf52011-11-18 00:26:51 +00005951 CXIdxEntityRef_Implicit = 2
Argyrios Kyrtzidis0c7735e52011-10-18 15:50:50 +00005952} CXIdxEntityRefKind;
5953
Argyrios Kyrtzidis11d61142011-10-27 17:36:12 +00005954/**
James Dennett574cb4c2012-06-15 05:41:51 +00005955 * \brief Data for IndexerCallbacks#indexEntityReference.
Argyrios Kyrtzidis11d61142011-10-27 17:36:12 +00005956 */
Argyrios Kyrtzidisdc199a32011-10-17 19:48:19 +00005957typedef struct {
Argyrios Kyrtzidis663c8ec2011-12-07 20:44:19 +00005958 CXIdxEntityRefKind kind;
Argyrios Kyrtzidis11d61142011-10-27 17:36:12 +00005959 /**
5960 * \brief Reference cursor.
5961 */
Argyrios Kyrtzidisdc199a32011-10-17 19:48:19 +00005962 CXCursor cursor;
5963 CXIdxLoc loc;
Argyrios Kyrtzidis11d61142011-10-27 17:36:12 +00005964 /**
5965 * \brief The entity that gets referenced.
5966 */
Argyrios Kyrtzidis3e429e72011-11-12 02:16:30 +00005967 const CXIdxEntityInfo *referencedEntity;
Argyrios Kyrtzidis11d61142011-10-27 17:36:12 +00005968 /**
5969 * \brief Immediate "parent" of the reference. For example:
5970 *
5971 * \code
5972 * Foo *var;
5973 * \endcode
5974 *
5975 * The parent of reference of type 'Foo' is the variable 'var'.
Argyrios Kyrtzidis25cb0ff2011-12-13 18:47:41 +00005976 * For references inside statement bodies of functions/methods,
5977 * the parentEntity will be the function/method.
Argyrios Kyrtzidis11d61142011-10-27 17:36:12 +00005978 */
Argyrios Kyrtzidis3e429e72011-11-12 02:16:30 +00005979 const CXIdxEntityInfo *parentEntity;
Argyrios Kyrtzidis11d61142011-10-27 17:36:12 +00005980 /**
Argyrios Kyrtzidis25cb0ff2011-12-13 18:47:41 +00005981 * \brief Lexical container context of the reference.
Argyrios Kyrtzidis11d61142011-10-27 17:36:12 +00005982 */
Argyrios Kyrtzidis4c910b12011-11-22 07:24:51 +00005983 const CXIdxContainerInfo *container;
Argyrios Kyrtzidisdc199a32011-10-17 19:48:19 +00005984} CXIdxEntityRefInfo;
5985
James Dennett574cb4c2012-06-15 05:41:51 +00005986/**
5987 * \brief A group of callbacks used by #clang_indexSourceFile and
5988 * #clang_indexTranslationUnit.
5989 */
Argyrios Kyrtzidisdc199a32011-10-17 19:48:19 +00005990typedef struct {
Argyrios Kyrtzidis11d61142011-10-27 17:36:12 +00005991 /**
Argyrios Kyrtzidis3e429e72011-11-12 02:16:30 +00005992 * \brief Called periodically to check whether indexing should be aborted.
5993 * Should return 0 to continue, and non-zero to abort.
5994 */
5995 int (*abortQuery)(CXClientData client_data, void *reserved);
5996
5997 /**
Argyrios Kyrtzidiseffdbf52011-11-18 00:26:51 +00005998 * \brief Called at the end of indexing; passes the complete diagnostic set.
Argyrios Kyrtzidis11d61142011-10-27 17:36:12 +00005999 */
Argyrios Kyrtzidisdc199a32011-10-17 19:48:19 +00006000 void (*diagnostic)(CXClientData client_data,
Argyrios Kyrtzidiseffdbf52011-11-18 00:26:51 +00006001 CXDiagnosticSet, void *reserved);
Argyrios Kyrtzidisdc199a32011-10-17 19:48:19 +00006002
Argyrios Kyrtzidis7519c5e2011-11-11 00:23:36 +00006003 CXIdxClientFile (*enteredMainFile)(CXClientData client_data,
James Dennett574cb4c2012-06-15 05:41:51 +00006004 CXFile mainFile, void *reserved);
Argyrios Kyrtzidis7519c5e2011-11-11 00:23:36 +00006005
Argyrios Kyrtzidis11d61142011-10-27 17:36:12 +00006006 /**
James Dennett574cb4c2012-06-15 05:41:51 +00006007 * \brief Called when a file gets \#included/\#imported.
Argyrios Kyrtzidis11d61142011-10-27 17:36:12 +00006008 */
Argyrios Kyrtzidis7519c5e2011-11-11 00:23:36 +00006009 CXIdxClientFile (*ppIncludedFile)(CXClientData client_data,
Argyrios Kyrtzidis3e429e72011-11-12 02:16:30 +00006010 const CXIdxIncludedFileInfo *);
Argyrios Kyrtzidisdc199a32011-10-17 19:48:19 +00006011
Argyrios Kyrtzidis11d61142011-10-27 17:36:12 +00006012 /**
6013 * \brief Called when a AST file (PCH or module) gets imported.
6014 *
6015 * AST files will not get indexed (there will not be callbacks to index all
6016 * the entities in an AST file). The recommended action is that, if the AST
Argyrios Kyrtzidis472eda02012-10-02 16:10:38 +00006017 * file is not already indexed, to initiate a new indexing job specific to
6018 * the AST file.
Argyrios Kyrtzidis11d61142011-10-27 17:36:12 +00006019 */
Argyrios Kyrtzidis7519c5e2011-11-11 00:23:36 +00006020 CXIdxClientASTFile (*importedASTFile)(CXClientData client_data,
Argyrios Kyrtzidis3e429e72011-11-12 02:16:30 +00006021 const CXIdxImportedASTFileInfo *);
Argyrios Kyrtzidisdc199a32011-10-17 19:48:19 +00006022
Argyrios Kyrtzidis11d61142011-10-27 17:36:12 +00006023 /**
6024 * \brief Called at the beginning of indexing a translation unit.
6025 */
Argyrios Kyrtzidis7519c5e2011-11-11 00:23:36 +00006026 CXIdxClientContainer (*startedTranslationUnit)(CXClientData client_data,
Argyrios Kyrtzidis3e429e72011-11-12 02:16:30 +00006027 void *reserved);
Argyrios Kyrtzidisdc199a32011-10-17 19:48:19 +00006028
Argyrios Kyrtzidis3e429e72011-11-12 02:16:30 +00006029 void (*indexDeclaration)(CXClientData client_data,
Argyrios Kyrtzidis4c910b12011-11-22 07:24:51 +00006030 const CXIdxDeclInfo *);
Argyrios Kyrtzidisdc199a32011-10-17 19:48:19 +00006031
Argyrios Kyrtzidis11d61142011-10-27 17:36:12 +00006032 /**
6033 * \brief Called to index a reference of an entity.
6034 */
Argyrios Kyrtzidisdc199a32011-10-17 19:48:19 +00006035 void (*indexEntityReference)(CXClientData client_data,
Argyrios Kyrtzidis3e429e72011-11-12 02:16:30 +00006036 const CXIdxEntityRefInfo *);
Argyrios Kyrtzidisdc199a32011-10-17 19:48:19 +00006037
6038} IndexerCallbacks;
6039
NAKAMURA Takumiaacef7e2011-11-11 02:51:09 +00006040CINDEX_LINKAGE int clang_index_isEntityObjCContainerKind(CXIdxEntityKind);
Argyrios Kyrtzidis3e429e72011-11-12 02:16:30 +00006041CINDEX_LINKAGE const CXIdxObjCContainerDeclInfo *
6042clang_index_getObjCContainerDeclInfo(const CXIdxDeclInfo *);
Argyrios Kyrtzidis7519c5e2011-11-11 00:23:36 +00006043
Argyrios Kyrtzidis3e429e72011-11-12 02:16:30 +00006044CINDEX_LINKAGE const CXIdxObjCInterfaceDeclInfo *
6045clang_index_getObjCInterfaceDeclInfo(const CXIdxDeclInfo *);
6046
NAKAMURA Takumiaacef7e2011-11-11 02:51:09 +00006047CINDEX_LINKAGE
Argyrios Kyrtzidis3e429e72011-11-12 02:16:30 +00006048const CXIdxObjCCategoryDeclInfo *
6049clang_index_getObjCCategoryDeclInfo(const CXIdxDeclInfo *);
6050
Argyrios Kyrtzidis86acd722011-11-14 22:39:19 +00006051CINDEX_LINKAGE const CXIdxObjCProtocolRefListInfo *
6052clang_index_getObjCProtocolRefListInfo(const CXIdxDeclInfo *);
Argyrios Kyrtzidis7519c5e2011-11-11 00:23:36 +00006053
Argyrios Kyrtzidis93db2922012-02-28 17:50:33 +00006054CINDEX_LINKAGE const CXIdxObjCPropertyDeclInfo *
6055clang_index_getObjCPropertyDeclInfo(const CXIdxDeclInfo *);
6056
Argyrios Kyrtzidiseffdbf52011-11-18 00:26:51 +00006057CINDEX_LINKAGE const CXIdxIBOutletCollectionAttrInfo *
6058clang_index_getIBOutletCollectionAttrInfo(const CXIdxAttrInfo *);
6059
Argyrios Kyrtzidis4c910b12011-11-22 07:24:51 +00006060CINDEX_LINKAGE const CXIdxCXXClassDeclInfo *
6061clang_index_getCXXClassDeclInfo(const CXIdxDeclInfo *);
6062
6063/**
6064 * \brief For retrieving a custom CXIdxClientContainer attached to a
6065 * container.
6066 */
6067CINDEX_LINKAGE CXIdxClientContainer
6068clang_index_getClientContainer(const CXIdxContainerInfo *);
6069
6070/**
6071 * \brief For setting a custom CXIdxClientContainer attached to a
6072 * container.
6073 */
6074CINDEX_LINKAGE void
6075clang_index_setClientContainer(const CXIdxContainerInfo *,CXIdxClientContainer);
6076
6077/**
6078 * \brief For retrieving a custom CXIdxClientEntity attached to an entity.
6079 */
6080CINDEX_LINKAGE CXIdxClientEntity
6081clang_index_getClientEntity(const CXIdxEntityInfo *);
6082
6083/**
6084 * \brief For setting a custom CXIdxClientEntity attached to an entity.
6085 */
6086CINDEX_LINKAGE void
6087clang_index_setClientEntity(const CXIdxEntityInfo *, CXIdxClientEntity);
6088
6089/**
Argyrios Kyrtzidis8b71bc72012-12-06 19:41:16 +00006090 * \brief An indexing action/session, to be applied to one or multiple
6091 * translation units.
Argyrios Kyrtzidis4c910b12011-11-22 07:24:51 +00006092 */
6093typedef void *CXIndexAction;
6094
6095/**
Argyrios Kyrtzidis8b71bc72012-12-06 19:41:16 +00006096 * \brief An indexing action/session, to be applied to one or multiple
6097 * translation units.
Argyrios Kyrtzidis4c910b12011-11-22 07:24:51 +00006098 *
6099 * \param CIdx The index object with which the index action will be associated.
6100 */
6101CINDEX_LINKAGE CXIndexAction clang_IndexAction_create(CXIndex CIdx);
6102
6103/**
6104 * \brief Destroy the given index action.
6105 *
6106 * The index action must not be destroyed until all of the translation units
6107 * created within that index action have been destroyed.
6108 */
6109CINDEX_LINKAGE void clang_IndexAction_dispose(CXIndexAction);
6110
Argyrios Kyrtzidisd992e142011-11-15 06:20:16 +00006111typedef enum {
6112 /**
6113 * \brief Used to indicate that no special indexing options are needed.
6114 */
6115 CXIndexOpt_None = 0x0,
6116
6117 /**
James Dennett574cb4c2012-06-15 05:41:51 +00006118 * \brief Used to indicate that IndexerCallbacks#indexEntityReference should
6119 * be invoked for only one reference of an entity per source file that does
6120 * not also include a declaration/definition of the entity.
Argyrios Kyrtzidisd992e142011-11-15 06:20:16 +00006121 */
Argyrios Kyrtzidisfb7d1452012-01-14 00:11:49 +00006122 CXIndexOpt_SuppressRedundantRefs = 0x1,
6123
6124 /**
6125 * \brief Function-local symbols should be indexed. If this is not set
6126 * function-local symbols will be ignored.
6127 */
Argyrios Kyrtzidis7e747952012-02-14 22:23:11 +00006128 CXIndexOpt_IndexFunctionLocalSymbols = 0x2,
6129
6130 /**
6131 * \brief Implicit function/class template instantiations should be indexed.
6132 * If this is not set, implicit instantiations will be ignored.
6133 */
Argyrios Kyrtzidis6c9ed7d2012-03-27 21:38:03 +00006134 CXIndexOpt_IndexImplicitTemplateInstantiations = 0x4,
6135
6136 /**
6137 * \brief Suppress all compiler warnings when parsing for indexing.
6138 */
Argyrios Kyrtzidis8b71bc72012-12-06 19:41:16 +00006139 CXIndexOpt_SuppressWarnings = 0x8,
6140
6141 /**
6142 * \brief Skip a function/method body that was already parsed during an
Nico Weber7deebef2014-04-24 03:17:47 +00006143 * indexing session associated with a \c CXIndexAction object.
Argyrios Kyrtzidis8b71bc72012-12-06 19:41:16 +00006144 * Bodies in system headers are always skipped.
6145 */
6146 CXIndexOpt_SkipParsedBodiesInSession = 0x10
6147
Argyrios Kyrtzidisd992e142011-11-15 06:20:16 +00006148} CXIndexOptFlags;
6149
Argyrios Kyrtzidis11d61142011-10-27 17:36:12 +00006150/**
6151 * \brief Index the given source file and the translation unit corresponding
James Dennett574cb4c2012-06-15 05:41:51 +00006152 * to that file via callbacks implemented through #IndexerCallbacks.
Argyrios Kyrtzidis11d61142011-10-27 17:36:12 +00006153 *
6154 * \param client_data pointer data supplied by the client, which will
6155 * be passed to the invoked callbacks.
6156 *
6157 * \param index_callbacks Pointer to indexing callbacks that the client
6158 * implements.
6159 *
James Dennett574cb4c2012-06-15 05:41:51 +00006160 * \param index_callbacks_size Size of #IndexerCallbacks structure that gets
Argyrios Kyrtzidis11d61142011-10-27 17:36:12 +00006161 * passed in index_callbacks.
6162 *
Argyrios Kyrtzidisd992e142011-11-15 06:20:16 +00006163 * \param index_options A bitmask of options that affects how indexing is
6164 * performed. This should be a bitwise OR of the CXIndexOpt_XXX flags.
Argyrios Kyrtzidis11d61142011-10-27 17:36:12 +00006165 *
Dmitri Gribenkoea4d1c32014-02-12 19:12:37 +00006166 * \param[out] out_TU pointer to store a \c CXTranslationUnit that can be
6167 * reused after indexing is finished. Set to \c NULL if you do not require it.
Argyrios Kyrtzidis11d61142011-10-27 17:36:12 +00006168 *
Dmitri Gribenkoea4d1c32014-02-12 19:12:37 +00006169 * \returns 0 on success or if there were errors from which the compiler could
Eric Christopher2c4555a2015-06-19 01:52:53 +00006170 * recover. If there is a failure from which there is no recovery, returns
Dmitri Gribenkoea4d1c32014-02-12 19:12:37 +00006171 * a non-zero \c CXErrorCode.
Argyrios Kyrtzidisd992e142011-11-15 06:20:16 +00006172 *
James Dennett574cb4c2012-06-15 05:41:51 +00006173 * The rest of the parameters are the same as #clang_parseTranslationUnit.
Argyrios Kyrtzidis11d61142011-10-27 17:36:12 +00006174 */
Argyrios Kyrtzidis4c910b12011-11-22 07:24:51 +00006175CINDEX_LINKAGE int clang_indexSourceFile(CXIndexAction,
Argyrios Kyrtzidisdc199a32011-10-17 19:48:19 +00006176 CXClientData client_data,
6177 IndexerCallbacks *index_callbacks,
6178 unsigned index_callbacks_size,
6179 unsigned index_options,
6180 const char *source_filename,
6181 const char * const *command_line_args,
6182 int num_command_line_args,
6183 struct CXUnsavedFile *unsaved_files,
6184 unsigned num_unsaved_files,
6185 CXTranslationUnit *out_TU,
6186 unsigned TU_options);
6187
Argyrios Kyrtzidis11d61142011-10-27 17:36:12 +00006188/**
Benjamin Kramerc02670e2015-11-18 16:14:27 +00006189 * \brief Same as clang_indexSourceFile but requires a full command line
6190 * for \c command_line_args including argv[0]. This is useful if the standard
6191 * library paths are relative to the binary.
6192 */
6193CINDEX_LINKAGE int clang_indexSourceFileFullArgv(
6194 CXIndexAction, CXClientData client_data, IndexerCallbacks *index_callbacks,
6195 unsigned index_callbacks_size, unsigned index_options,
6196 const char *source_filename, const char *const *command_line_args,
6197 int num_command_line_args, struct CXUnsavedFile *unsaved_files,
6198 unsigned num_unsaved_files, CXTranslationUnit *out_TU, unsigned TU_options);
6199
6200/**
Argyrios Kyrtzidisd992e142011-11-15 06:20:16 +00006201 * \brief Index the given translation unit via callbacks implemented through
James Dennett574cb4c2012-06-15 05:41:51 +00006202 * #IndexerCallbacks.
Argyrios Kyrtzidisd992e142011-11-15 06:20:16 +00006203 *
6204 * The order of callback invocations is not guaranteed to be the same as
6205 * when indexing a source file. The high level order will be:
6206 *
6207 * -Preprocessor callbacks invocations
6208 * -Declaration/reference callbacks invocations
6209 * -Diagnostic callback invocations
6210 *
James Dennett574cb4c2012-06-15 05:41:51 +00006211 * The parameters are the same as #clang_indexSourceFile.
Argyrios Kyrtzidisd992e142011-11-15 06:20:16 +00006212 *
Eric Christopher2c4555a2015-06-19 01:52:53 +00006213 * \returns If there is a failure from which there is no recovery, returns
Argyrios Kyrtzidisd992e142011-11-15 06:20:16 +00006214 * non-zero, otherwise returns 0.
6215 */
Argyrios Kyrtzidis4c910b12011-11-22 07:24:51 +00006216CINDEX_LINKAGE int clang_indexTranslationUnit(CXIndexAction,
Argyrios Kyrtzidisd992e142011-11-15 06:20:16 +00006217 CXClientData client_data,
6218 IndexerCallbacks *index_callbacks,
6219 unsigned index_callbacks_size,
Argyrios Kyrtzidis4c910b12011-11-22 07:24:51 +00006220 unsigned index_options,
6221 CXTranslationUnit);
Argyrios Kyrtzidisd992e142011-11-15 06:20:16 +00006222
6223/**
Argyrios Kyrtzidis11d61142011-10-27 17:36:12 +00006224 * \brief Retrieve the CXIdxFile, file, line, column, and offset represented by
6225 * the given CXIdxLoc.
6226 *
6227 * If the location refers into a macro expansion, retrieves the
6228 * location of the macro expansion and if it refers into a macro argument
6229 * retrieves the location of the argument.
6230 */
Argyrios Kyrtzidisdc199a32011-10-17 19:48:19 +00006231CINDEX_LINKAGE void clang_indexLoc_getFileLocation(CXIdxLoc loc,
Argyrios Kyrtzidis7519c5e2011-11-11 00:23:36 +00006232 CXIdxClientFile *indexFile,
Argyrios Kyrtzidisdc199a32011-10-17 19:48:19 +00006233 CXFile *file,
6234 unsigned *line,
6235 unsigned *column,
6236 unsigned *offset);
6237
Argyrios Kyrtzidis11d61142011-10-27 17:36:12 +00006238/**
6239 * \brief Retrieve the CXSourceLocation represented by the given CXIdxLoc.
6240 */
Argyrios Kyrtzidisdc199a32011-10-17 19:48:19 +00006241CINDEX_LINKAGE
6242CXSourceLocation clang_indexLoc_getCXSourceLocation(CXIdxLoc loc);
6243
Argyrios Kyrtzidiscddafd32011-10-06 07:00:54 +00006244/**
Argyrios Kyrtzidis2bff5162015-04-13 16:55:04 +00006245 * \brief Visitor invoked for each field found by a traversal.
6246 *
6247 * This visitor function will be invoked for each field found by
6248 * \c clang_Type_visitFields. Its first argument is the cursor being
6249 * visited, its second argument is the client data provided to
6250 * \c clang_Type_visitFields.
6251 *
6252 * The visitor should return one of the \c CXVisitorResult values
6253 * to direct \c clang_Type_visitFields.
6254 */
6255typedef enum CXVisitorResult (*CXFieldVisitor)(CXCursor C,
6256 CXClientData client_data);
6257
6258/**
6259 * \brief Visit the fields of a particular type.
6260 *
6261 * This function visits all the direct fields of the given cursor,
6262 * invoking the given \p visitor function with the cursors of each
6263 * visited field. The traversal may be ended prematurely, if
6264 * the visitor returns \c CXFieldVisit_Break.
6265 *
6266 * \param T the record type whose field may be visited.
6267 *
6268 * \param visitor the visitor function that will be invoked for each
6269 * field of \p T.
6270 *
6271 * \param client_data pointer data supplied by the client, which will
6272 * be passed to the visitor each time it is invoked.
6273 *
6274 * \returns a non-zero value if the traversal was terminated
6275 * prematurely by the visitor returning \c CXFieldVisit_Break.
6276 */
6277CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_Type_visitFields(CXType T,
6278 CXFieldVisitor visitor,
6279 CXClientData client_data);
6280
Argyrios Kyrtzidis2bff5162015-04-13 16:55:04 +00006281/**
Argyrios Kyrtzidiscddafd32011-10-06 07:00:54 +00006282 * @}
6283 */
6284
Douglas Gregor6007cf22010-01-22 22:29:16 +00006285/**
6286 * @}
6287 */
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00006288
Ted Kremenekb60d87c2009-08-26 22:36:44 +00006289#ifdef __cplusplus
6290}
6291#endif
6292#endif